MIKE Zero

Preprocessing
& Postprocessing

User Guide
Generic Editors and Viewers

Powering Water Decisions MIKE 2024

2 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
PLEASE NOTE

COPYRIGHT This document refers to proprietary computer software which is pro-

tected by copyright. All rights are reserved. Copying or other repro-
duction of this manual or the related programs is prohibited without
prior written consent of DHI A/S (hereinafter referred to as “DHI”).
For details please refer to your 'DHI Software Licence Agreement'.

LIMITED LIABILITY The liability of DHI is limited as specified in your DHI Software
Licence Agreement:

In no event shall DHI or its representatives (agents and suppliers)

be liable for any damages whatsoever including, without limitation,
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages or damages
for loss of business profits or savings, business interruption, loss of
business information or other pecuniary loss arising in connection
with the Agreement, e.g. out of Licensee's use of or the inability to
use the Software, even if DHI has been advised of the possibility of
such damages.

This limitation shall apply to claims of personal injury to the extent

permitted by law. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of liability for consequential, special, indirect, incidental
damages and, accordingly, some portions of these limitations may
not apply.

Notwithstanding the above, DHI's total liability (whether in contract,

tort, including negligence, or otherwise) under or in connection with
the Agreement shall in aggregate during the term not exceed the
lesser of EUR 10.000 or the fees paid by Licensee under the Agree-
ment during the 12 months' period previous to the event giving rise
to a claim.

Licensee acknowledge that the liability limitations and exclusions

set out in the Agreement reflect the allocation of risk negotiated and
agreed by the parties and that DHI would not enter into the Agree-
ment without these limitations and exclusions on its liability. These
limitations and exclusions will apply notwithstanding any failure of
essential purpose of any limited remedy.

Powering Water Decisions 3

4 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
CONTENTS

Time Series Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1 Time Series Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.2 New File Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 Import of time series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.1 Import from ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.3.2 Import from Advanced ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.3.3 Import from Excel File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.4 Import from KMD or KM2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.5 Profile Evolution Hydrodynamics template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.6 Wind template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4 Export of time series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.1 Export to Simple ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.2 Export to Advanced ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.4.3 Export to Excel File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.5 File Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.2 Axis Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.5.3 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.5.4 Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.6 Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7 Graphical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.7.1 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.7.2 Editing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.7.3 Graphical and font settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.7.4 TS Types graphical representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.8 Graphical Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.9 Font Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.10 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.11 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.11.1 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.11.2 Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.11.3 Select Sub-Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.11.4 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.11.5 Edit Custom Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Profile Series Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Powering Water Decisions 5

2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.1 Create a New Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.2 Open an Existing Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.3 Editing the Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
2.4 Further help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.1 New Profile Series Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.1.1 Cross-shore profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.1.2 Pier Resistance Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.1.3 ADCP Vector Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.2 Geographical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3 File Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3.2 Axis Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3.3 Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.4 Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.4.1 Cell format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.5 Graphical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.5.1 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.5.2 Graphical and font settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.6 Navigation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.7 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.7.1 DFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.7.2 ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.8 Import from ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
3.8.1 File to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.8.2 Completion and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.9 Export to ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.1 Edit Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.1.2 Sub set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2 Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2.1 Gap filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.2.2 Sub-set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.3 Edit Custom Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Grid Series Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

5 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.1 Create a New Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.2 Open an Existing Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.3 Editing the Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.4 Further help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

6 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

6 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.1 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.1.1 DFS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.1.2 ASCII format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6.1.3 Grid State Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.2 New Grid Series File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2.1 Step 1: Select the type of grid to be created . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.2.2 Step 2: Specify the projection, the geographical position of the origin of the
dataset and the orientation 73
6.2.3 Step 3: Specify the temporal and spatial properties . . . . . . . . . . 74
6.2.4 Step 4: Specify the items to be included . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.2.5 Step 5: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3 Import from ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.1 File to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3.2 Completion and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.3.3 Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.4 Export to ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5 Import from Dfsu File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.1 Step 1: Select File to Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.2 Step 2: Specify geographical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.5.3 Step 3: Specify the spatial properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.4 Step 4: Specify land value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.5 Step 5: Completion and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.6 Step 6: Modifying Custom Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.1 Clipboard and object editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.2 Geographical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.3 Time Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.3.1 Modifying Time Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.4 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.4.1 Editing an existing file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.5 Spatial Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.6 Edit Custom Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.1 Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.2 Graphical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.3 Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.4 Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.4.1 Map Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.4.2 North Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.5 Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.6 Axis Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.7 Mouse Pointer Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.8 Fixed Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.9 Zoom and pan facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Powering Water Decisions 7

 8.10 Export Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.11 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.11.1 Grid Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.11.2 Grid Editor Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.12 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
9 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.1 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.2 Go to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.3 Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
9.4 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.4.1 Select and deselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
9.4.2 Select a Sub-Set of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.5 Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.5.1 Active Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
9.5.2 Interpolation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
9.5.3 Search Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
9.6 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
9.7 Set Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9.8 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9.8.1 List of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
9.9 Calculate Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9.10 Copy File into Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9.10.1 File to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.10.2 Item Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.10.3 2D to 3D Layer Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.10.4 Sub-area Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
9.10.5 Time Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
9.10.6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
9.11 Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10 Data Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.1 Image Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.2 Overlay Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Bathymetry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

11 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
12 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
12.1 Step 1: Create a new Bathymetry document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
12.2 Step 2: Import background data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
12.3 Step 3: Import digitised survey depth data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12.4 Step 4: Import data from background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
12.5 Case A - Create Grid Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
12.5.1 Step 5A: Define grid bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
12.5.2 Step 6A: Interpolate xyz data to grid points . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

8 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 12.5.3 Step 7A: Save bathymetry file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
12.6 Case B - Create Line Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.6.1 Step 5B: Define line bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
12.6.2 Step 6B: Interpolate xyz data to grid points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
12.6.3 Step 7B: Save bathymetry file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
13 Dialog Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.1.1 File/New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
13.1.2 File/Open Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
13.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13.4 Work Area Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.4.1 Set Current Contour Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.4.2 Grid Bathymetry Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
13.4.3 Line Bathymetry Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
13.4.4 Background Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
13.4.5 Export raw data to XYZ format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
13.4.6 Resize workspace area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
13.4.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
13.4.8 Set Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.4.9 Show Background Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.5 Grid Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.5.1 New Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
13.5.2 Edit Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
13.5.3 Export Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
13.5.4 Interpolate Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
13.6 Line Bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
13.6.1 New bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
13.6.2 Edit bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.6.3 Export bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.6.4 Interpolate bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
13.7 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.8 Toolbar Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Mesh Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

14 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
14.1 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
14.2 Boundary Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
14.3 Context sensitive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
15 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
15.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
15.2 Data Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
15.3 Step 1 - Create a New Mesh Generator Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
15.4 Step 2 - Import Model Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Powering Water Decisions 9

 15.5 Step 3 - Editing the Land Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
15.6 Step 4 - Specification of Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
15.7 Step 5 - Specification of Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
15.8 Step 6 - Mesh Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
15.9 Step 7 - Smooth the Land Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
15.10 Step 8 - Smoothing the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
15.11 Step 9 - Interpolation of a Bathymetry to the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
15.12 Step 10 - Using Polygons to Control the Node Density . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
15.13 Step 11 - Using Polygons to Define Mesh Resolution Type . . . . . . . . . . 163
15.14 Step 12 - Analyse the mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
16 Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.2.1 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.2.2 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.2.3 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.2.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.3.1 Coordinate Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.3.2 Zoom facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
16.3.3 Go To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
16.3.4 Drawing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
16.3.5 Export Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.3.6 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.3.7 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.4 Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.4.1 Import Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
16.4.2 Export Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.4.3 Clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.4.4 Convert Nodes to Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.4.5 Convert Vertices to Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
16.4.6 Redistribute Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
16.4.7 Manage Scatter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
16.4.8 Prioritize Scatter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
16.4.9 Scatter Data Visualisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.5 Mesh Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.5.1 Import mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16.5.2 Generate mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
16.5.3 Smooth Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.5.4 Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
16.5.5 Refine Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16.5.6 Analyse Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
16.5.7 Arc/Mesh editing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
16.5.8 Delete Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16.5.9 Export Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16.5.10 Mesh Visualisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

10 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 16.5.11 Contour Visualisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.6 Shoreline Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.6.1 Manage shoreline data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.6.2 Export shoreline data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
16.6.3 Manage edge map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
16.6.4 Export edge map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16.6.5 Manage profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
16.6.6 Export profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
16.7 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16.7.1 Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
16.7.2 Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16.7.3 Import Graphic Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
16.7.4 Graphics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.7.5 Use Attribute Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.7.6 Mesh Editing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.8 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
17 Toolbar Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
17.1 Navigate Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
17.2 Boundary Definition Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
17.2.1 Point properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
17.2.2 Arc properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
17.2.3 Polygon properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
17.2.4 Break line properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
17.3 Info Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
17.4 Scatter Data Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
17.4.1 Graphically adding scatter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
17.4.2 Graphically selecting scatter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
17.4.3 Deleting scatter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
17.4.4 Scatter data editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
17.5 Prioritization Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
17.5.1 Prioritization area name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
17.6 Mesh Editing Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
17.6.1 Delete mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
17.6.2 Move mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
17.6.3 Add mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
17.6.4 Add mesh node at boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
17.6.5 Collapse element face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
17.6.6 Collapse element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
17.6.7 Merge triangular elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
17.6.8 Edit mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
17.6.9 Re-interpolate z-values in selected region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
17.6.10 Re-triangulate mesh in selected region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Data Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Powering Water Decisions 11

18 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
19 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
20 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
20.2 Step 1 - Visualize salt intrusion in the model area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
20.3 Step 2 - Viewing the flow field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
20.4 Step 3 - Making a time series plot of the salinity concentration at two points . 243
20.5 Step 4 - Creating a Vertical profile of the current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
20.6 Step 5 - Inspecting data values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
20.7 Step 6 - Making a video animation of salt intrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
21 Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.1.1 File/New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.1.2 File/Open Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.1.3 File/Save (Save As) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
21.3.1 Coordinate Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
21.3.2 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
21.3.3 Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.4 Axis Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.5 Value at Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.6 Zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.7 Zoom to Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.8 Zoom Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
21.3.9 Fixed Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.3.10 Export Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.3.11 Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.3.12 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.3.13 Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.4 Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
21.4.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
21.4.2 Vertical Profile by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
21.4.3 Time series by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
21.4.4 Selected Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
21.4.5 Item selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
21.4.6 Add and remove layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
21.5 Video Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
21.5.1 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
21.6 Colors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
21.6.1 Auto Scale Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
21.6.2 New Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
21.6.3 Save Current Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
21.6.4 Edit Current Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
21.6.5 Open Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

12 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 21.7 Time series context menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
21.7.1 Select Item for Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
22 Toolbar Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
22.1 Zoom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
22.2 Data Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
22.3 Navigation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

23 Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
23.1 Operation and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
23.1.1 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
23.1.2 Cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
23.2 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
23.2.1 New file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
23.2.2 Open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
23.3 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
23.3.1 Clipboard and object editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
23.3.2 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
23.3.3 Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23.3.4 Mark and restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23.4 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23.4.1 Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
23.4.2 Add/Remove images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
23.5 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
23.5.1 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
23.5.2 Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
23.5.3 Export to xyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
23.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
23.6.1 Comparing simulation results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
23.6.2 Creating initial conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
23.6.3 Replacing certain values with delete value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Data Extraction FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

24 Data Extraction FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24.1 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24.2 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24.2.1 Geographical view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24.2.2 Output specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24.2.3 Output items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Time Series Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Powering Water Decisions 13

25 Time Series Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
25.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
25.2 Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
25.2.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
25.2.2 Comparison results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
25.2.3 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
25.3 Scientific Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
25.3.1 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
25.4 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
25.4.1 Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
25.4.2 Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
25.4.3 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Result Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

26 Result Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
26.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
26.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
26.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
26.3.1 Coordinate Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
26.3.2 Mouse Pointer Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
26.3.3 Zoom facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
26.3.4 Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
26.3.5 Export Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
26.3.6 Aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
26.3.7 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
26.3.8 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
26.4 Projects Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
26.4.1 Add Files to Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
26.4.2 Overlay Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
26.4.3 Active View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
26.4.4 Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
26.4.5 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
26.5 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
26.5.1 Common View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
26.5.2 Image file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
26.5.3 Background tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
26.5.4 Grid (Curvilinear, Rectangular or Unstructured) . . . . . . . . . . . 333
26.5.5 Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
26.5.6 Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
26.5.7 Vector Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
26.5.8 Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
26.5.9 Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
26.5.10 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
26.5.11 3D Items properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
26.5.12 Cross-section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
26.5.13 UZ plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

14 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 26.5.14 Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
26.5.15 Spatial line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
26.5.16 Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
26.5.17 Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
26.5.18 Particle tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
26.5.19 XYZ data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
26.6 Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
26.7 Result Viewer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
26.7.1 Time series extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
26.7.2 Profile Extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
26.7.3 Cross-section extractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
26.7.4 UZ Specific Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

UNIT Base Group Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

27 Unit Base Group Editing Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
27.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
27.1.1 Technical background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
27.2 Dialog Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
27.3 Changing from SI to Imperial (American) data units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
27.4 Restoring the default units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
27.5 Verification of Item Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
27.6 Changing the EUM item type of a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
27.6.1 Changing the EUM Type of a .dfs0 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
27.6.2 Changing the EUM Type of a .dfs2 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

Data Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

28 Data Utility Editor - the DFS Header Editing Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
28.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
28.2 File Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
28.3 Dynamic Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
28.4 Static Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
28.5 Custom Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
28.5.1 M21_Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
28.5.2 MIKE_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
28.6 Data Type and Delete Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Powering Water Decisions 15

16 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
 TI M E S E R I E S E D I T O R

Powering Water Decisions 17

18 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Introduction

1 Time Series Editor

1.1 Introduction
The appearance of the Time Series Editor differs if you create a new (blank)
time series compared to opening an existing data (*.dfs0) file.

Creating a new time series requires specification of properties for the time
series file, and the File Properties dialog is therefore opened in this case.

If you are opening an existing time series data file, the data are immediately
presented in the Time Series data dialog where data can be viewed and
edited both in a graphical and in a tabular view. In this case, if you wish to
change the already defined file properties, it is required to open the File Prop-
erties dialog from the graphical view.

You operate the Time Series Editor from the main menu, the tool bar icons, or
by right-clicking on the graphical view.

1.2 New File Dialog

This dialog is used to create a new Time Series.

Figure 1.1 New file dialog in Time Series Editor

It is possible to create a "Blank" data set, import from ASCII file, Excel or
KMD/KML2 file, or select from a number of pre-defined templates containing
different sets of properties.

Powering Water Decisions 19

 Time Series Editor

If you chose "Blank Time Series", the File Properties Dialog is displayed with
a set of default properties. You can then customize the time series according
to your own needs.

If you choose to import from an ASCII File or Excel file and select the relevant
data file, the import dialog is displayed where you can set the properties for
the data.

The KMD/KM2 format is a predefined format so no additional specifications

are needed.

If you choose one of the template files, the File Properties Dialog is displayed
with a set of properties specific to this template. It may not be possible to edit
all of the properties. The following templates are available:

 Profile Evolution Hydrodynamics template

 Wind template

1.3 Import of time series

It is possible to create your new time series by importing from different for-
mats. In order to import you either go to 'File', 'New' and select 'Time Series'
under the MIKE Zero heading. This will open the 'New Time Series' dialog
where you can choose which file type to import from. If the Time Series Editor
is already open this can also be accessed from the menu 'File' and 'Import'.

1.3.1 Import from ASCII File

This functionality can be used to import time series data from an ASCII file.
The data set can then be saved as a dfs file or exported to an ASCII file
again. Please refer to File Formats.

20 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import of time series

File to Import
On the Import from ascii dialog select the ASCII file from which you wish to
import the data. The ASCII file must have a certain format in order to be read
correctly, see File Formats.

Time description
Choose the axis type of the data in the ASCII file. It’s impossible to know
which axis type the data in the ASCII file has. So, the user interaction is
needed in this property. You can select all the axis types: Equidistant Calen-
dar Axis, Equidistant Relative Axis, Non-Equidistant Calendar Axis, Non-
Equidistant Relative Axis and Relative Item Axis. Please refer to Axis Infor-
mation

Delimiter
Choose the Delimiter that separates the data in the ASCII File. When you use
Time series Editor to export to ASCII, the TAB is used as delimiter.

Treat consecutive delimiters as one

Set this option active means that all consecutive delimiters are treated as
one, e.g. if the delimiter is a TAB and there are 5 consecutive TABs, the
import from ASCII will deal with these 5 TABs as only one.

Powering Water Decisions 21

 Time Series Editor

Ignore delimiters in beginning of line

All delimiters in beginning of lines are ignored when this option is activated.

Delimiter between time and first item

When this option is activated, there must be a delimiter between the time for
each time step and the first item value. Otherwise, the time for each time step
is just followed by the first item value.

Delete Value
Fill in the Delete Value used in the file. The Delete value should be a number
not typical for the data and that represents meaningless data. When a delete
value is found on the data, the correspondent cell in the tabular view is empty
and there is no point in the graphical view.

Time Series Export ASCII format

When this option is enabled, all the settings are set according to the format a
time series is exported to ASCII using Time series Editor. You can only disa-
ble this option if you set an Equidistant axis type. Doing so, you can than set
the Start Time, the time step and the number of time steps supposed to exist
in the ASCII file.

Preview
File preview
Just below the description properties, there is the file preview, where you can
see the top part of the ASCII file specified.

Import preview
Below file preview, there is the import preview. Here you can preview the
result of the import with the selected description properties and change the
properties till you get the expected result

After all description properties are set as wished, click the OK button and the
import is done.

1.3.2 Import from Advanced ASCII File

This functionality can be used to import time series data from an ASCII file
where the data is structured in rows and columns. The data set can be saved
as a dfs file or exported to an ASCII or Excel file again.

22 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import of time series

File path
On the File Import dialog select the ASCII file from which you wish to import
the data. The ASCII file must be structured in rows and columns in order to be
read correctly.

Templates
It is possible to use a template for saving and reusing the properties on the
dialog for another import.

When you choose 'Save template file' and specify the location of the template
this will be saved with the defined properties when the ASCII file is imported.

If you choose 'Use template file' and specify a template file the properties will
be prefilled with values from the template.

Delimiter
Choose the delimiter that separates the data in the ASCII File.

Powering Water Decisions 23

 Time Series Editor

Treat consecutive delimiters as one

Set this option as active means that all consecutive delimiters are treated as
one, e.g. if the delimiter is a TAB and there are 5 consecutive TABs, the
import from ASCII will deal with these 5 TABs as one.

Ignore delimiters in beginning of line

All delimiters in beginning of lines are ignored when this option is activated.

Decimal separator
Choose the decimal separator used in the ASCII File.

Time description
Specify how the time is specified and in which format. It is possible to define
the time either by:

 Date and time imported from the ASCII file

 Time imported from the ASCII file and a user defined date specified in
the dialog
 Date imported from the ASCII file and a user defined time specified in the
dialog

For either type the date and time format are specified with the relevant col-
umn.

Data description
The item type, unit and value type can either be specified in the dialog directly
or can be imported from the ASCII file. If specified in the dialog all time series
will get the same properties. If the property is imported from the ASCII file the
relevant row should be specified.

The row of the item description and the first data must always be specified.

If the Delete value is not empty it is possible to either specify it directly for all
time series or import from the ASCII file. The Delete value should be a num-
ber not typical for the data and that represents meaningless data. When a
delete value is found on the data, the correspondent cell in the tabular view is
empty and there is no point in the graphical view.

Preview
Input file
On the preview tab you will see the top part of the ASCII file specified.

24 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import of time series

Import result
Below the input file the import result is displayed. Here you can preview the
result of the import with the selected description properties and change the
properties elsewhere till you get the expected result.

1.3.3 Import from Excel File

This functionality can be used to import time series data from an Excel file if
Excel is installed on the computer. The data set can then be saved as a dfs
file or exported to an ASCII or Excel file again.

File path
On the File Import dialog select the Excel file from which you wish to import
the data.

Templates
It is possible to use a template for saving and reusing the properties on the
dialog for another import.

Powering Water Decisions 25

 Time Series Editor

When you choose 'Save template file' and specify the location of the template
this will be saved with the defined properties when the Excel file is imported.

If you choose 'Use template file' and specify a template file the properties will
be prefilled with values from the template.

Excel Sheets
Specify the sheet number where the data should be imported.

Time description
Specify how the time is specified and potentially in which format. If no format
is specified it is assumed that the date and time are specified in the format
specified by Excel.

It is possible to define the time either by:

 Date and time specified in Excel file

 Time imported from the Excel file and a user defined date specified in the
dialog
 Date imported from the Excel file and a user defined time specified in the
dialog

For either type the date and time format are specified with the relevant col-
umn.

Data description
The item type, unit and value type can either be specified in the dialog directly
or can be imported from the Excel file. If specified in the dialog all time series
will get the same properties. If the property is imported from the Excel file the
relevant row should be specified.

The row of the item description and the first data must always be specified.

If the Delete value is not empty it is possible to either specify it directly for all
time series or import from the Excel file. The Delete value should be a num-
ber not typical for the data and that represents meaningless data. When a
delete value is found on the data, the correspondent cell in the tabular view is
empty and there is no point in the graphical view.

Preview
At the top of the preview tab you will see the first part of the Excel file speci-
fied.

At the bottom of the preview tab you will see the result of the import with the
selected description properties and change the properties elsewhere till you
get the expected result

26 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import of time series

1.3.4 Import from KMD or KM2 File

This functionality can be used to import time series data from a KMD or KM2
file. The data set can then be saved as a dfs file.

The KMD/KM2 format is a predefined format so no additional specifications

are needed.

1.3.5 Profile Evolution Hydrodynamics template

The Profile Evolution Hydrodynamics template creates a time series with the
following pre-defined properties

 Equidistant Calendar Axis

 10 seconds time step
 10 Time steps
 6 Items:
– Time of type Undefined and unit hour
– Wave Height of type Wave height and unit meter
– Wave Direction of type Wave direction and unit degree
– Wave Period of type Wave period and unit second
– Spreading Factor of type Spreading factor and unit ()
– Water Level of type Water Level and unit meter

You can edit the title, the start time, the time step and the number of time
steps.

It is always possible to customize the data set. When the data set has been
created, you can right-click in the graphical view and select "Properties". The
File Properties Dialog is displayed, and all the properties can be edited.

1.3.6 Wind template

Wind template creates a time series with the following pre-defined properties

 Equidistant Calendar Axis

 10 seconds time step
 10 Time steps
 2 Items:
– Speed of type Wind velocity and unit m/s
– Direction of type Wind direction and unit degree

The Title is Wind. You can edit the title, the start time, the time step and the
number of time steps.

Powering Water Decisions 27

 Time Series Editor

It is always possible to customize the data set. When the data set has been
created, you can right-click in the graphical view and select "Properties". The
File Properties Dialog is displayed, and all the properties can be edited.

1.4 Export of time series

It is possible to export your time series to different formats. In order to export
data go to the menu 'File' and 'Export'.

1.4.1 Export to Simple ASCII File

You can Export a Time series to an ASCII File. For further description of Time
Series File Formats, see File Formats.

Go to 'File', ‘Export’ and 'Export to Simple ASCII...'. In the pop-up window you
can specify where the ASCII File should be saved and under which File
Name.

The file is exported using default Time series Editor properties. When import-
ing an ASCII file exported by Time series Editor, just activate the Time Series
Export ASCII format property on the Import from ASCII dialog and the import
will be made with the expected result. Please refer to Import from ASCII File.

1.4.2 Export to Advanced ASCII File

This functionality can be used to export time series data to an ASCII file.

28 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Export of time series

File path
On the File Export dialog specify the output file.

Templates
It is possible to use a template for saving and reusing the properties on the
dialog for another export.

When you choose 'Save template file' and specify the location the template
the defined properties are saved when the ASCII file is exported.

If you choose 'Use template file' and specify a template file the properties will
be prefilled with values from the template.

Delimiter
Choose the Delimiter that separates the data in the ASCII File.

Powering Water Decisions 29

 Time Series Editor

Decimal separator
Choose the decimal separator used in the ASCII File.

Format specification
Specify format and column for date and time.

Specify rows for the different data descriptions.

Preview
In the preview area the result is previewed. If properties are changed the but-
ton 'Preview' will update the preview area.

1.4.3 Export to Excel File

This functionality can be used to export time series data to an Excel file if
Excel is installed on the computer.

30 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Export of time series

File path
On the File Export dialog specify the output file.

Templates
It is possible to use a template for saving and reusing the properties on the
dialog for another export.

When you choose 'Save template file' and specify the location the template
the defined properties are saved when the Excel file is exported.

If you choose 'Use template file' and specify a template file the properties will
be prefilled with values from the template.

Data Format
Specify format and column for date and time. If no format is specified it is
assumed that the date and time are specified in the format specified by Excel.

Specify rows for the different data descriptions.

Powering Water Decisions 31

 Time Series Editor

Preview
In the preview area the result is previewed. If properties are changed the but-
ton 'Preview' will update the preview area.

1.5 File Properties Dialog

This dialog is used to view and change the properties of the time series being
visualized.

1.5.1 General Information

Title:
The title for the data contained in the file. Any text can be typed here

1.5.2 Axis Information

Axis Type:
 The type of the time axis. You can select between the following types:

32 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Properties Dialog

 Equidistant Calendar Axis:

Data is stored with a fixed time interval and start at an absolute date and
time.

 Equidistant Relative Axis:

Data is stored with a fixed time interval, but do not have a absolute start
date and time. The start time is hence not applicable for this type.
Note: defined time step intervals are presented as number of seconds in
the Graphical View.

 Non-Equidistant Calendar Axis:

Each data point is stored at a specific, arbitrary and absolute date and
time. The start time and time step definitions are not applicable for this
type.

 Non-Equidistant Relative Axis:

Each data point is stored at a specific arbitrary and relative time. The
start time and time step are not applicable for this type.
Note: time step values must be defined as number of seconds.

 Relative Item Axis:

Non-time varying data. The first item is used for the X axis and the suc-
ceeding items are plotted against this item. The start time and the time
step are not applicable for this type. Y
It is possible to specify a specific unit for the X axis through the ‘Axis
Units’ selection list.

Start Time:
The start time of the data. This is only relevant for calendar axis data. The for-
mat used is the standard windows format. To change this edit the regional
settings in the windows control panel.

Time Step:
The time step for the data. Only relevant when the time axis is equidistant
(Equidistant Calendar Axis or Equidistant Time Axis). You can specify days,
hour:minute:second and milliseconds. A time step of one hour would thus be
given as “01:00:00” in the [hour:min:sec] input box.

No. of Time steps:

Number of time steps. If this number is changed, time steps are added or
removed as appropriate at the end of the time series. When adding time
steps, the new time steps added will be filled with an empty value, meaning
that no value has been inserted.

Axis units:
Spatial axis is not used in dfs0 files.

Powering Water Decisions 33

 Time Series Editor

1.5.3 Precision

Item values in dfs0 files can be specified in single precision or double preci-
sion.

You can specify the delete values for single precision and double precision,
respectively. The allowed ranges for delete values are listed in the table
below:

Table 1.1 Allowed ranges for delete value

Single precision Double precision

Minimum +/- 1.175494351e-38 +/- 2.2250738585072014e-308
Maximum +/-3.402823466e+38 +/- 1.7976931348623158e+308

You also have the opportunity to convert all items in the file to either single
precision or double precision with one click.

NOTE: The engines and tools in MIKE Zero are in general only validated for
use with input items in single precision. Using double precision may lead to
unexpected results. In some instances, e.g. when using the Passing Vessel
tool for Mooring Analysis, double precision items are expected.

1.5.4 Item Information

Name:
Text that identifies the item.

Type:
The type of the data contained in the item, indicating if it is e.g. a water level,
wave height, etc. It is possible to select from a number of types using the
combo box which appears if you click in the field. If a type not contained in the
list is needed, write the type in the text field. This also applies to the unit
below.

Unit:
Text that identifies the unit of the item. Unit is always related to the type. It is
possible to select from a number of units using the combo box which appears
if you click in the field. If a unit not contained in the list is needed, write the
unit in the text field.

Precision
You can specify an item to save values in either single precision or double
precision.

NOTE: The engines and tools in MIKE Zero are in general only validated for
use with input items in single precision. Using double precision may lead to

34 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Properties Dialog

unexpected results. In some instances, e.g. when using the Passing Vessel
tool for Mooring Analysis, double precision items are expected.

TS Type:
The type of the time series for the item. It’s used to specify the meaning of the
data values. You can select between the following types:

 Instantaneous: means that the values are representative at one precise

instant. For example, the wind velocity is an instantaneous value. This
type is the default type.

 Accumulated: means that the values are representative of one succes-

sive accumulation over the time and always relative to the start of the
event to register values from. For example, the rainfall accumulated over
the year if we have monthly rainfall values.

 Step Accumulated: means that values are representative of an accumu-

lation over a time step. Values represent the timespan between the previ-
ous time step and the current time step

 Mean Step Accumulated: means that values are representative of an

average accumulation per time step. Values represent the timespan
between the previous time step and the current time step

 Reverse Mean Step Accumulated: is equal to Mean Step Accumulated

type, but values represent the timespan between the current time step
and the next Time step. Used for forecasting purposes

The representation for each of the TS Types is different, since the physical
meaning of values is also different. You can read more about TS Value types
in Appendix A.5 in file ‘SDK_UserGuide.pdf’ supplied with the installation of
MIKE SDK.

Pos (x,y,z):
Coordinate that identifies a spatial location related to the item values.

Min.:
Minimum value for all data in the item. This value is not editable since it’s
based on statistical information of the Item.

Max.:
Maximum value for all data in the item. This value is not editable since it’s
based on statistical information of the Item.

Mean:
Mean value for the data in the item. This value is not editable since it’s based
on statistical information of the Item.

Powering Water Decisions 35

 Time Series Editor

Insert:
Insert an item before the selected one. This item will be named “Untitled” and
you can immediately edit the Item properties.

Append:
Append an item at the end of the list. This item will be named “Untitled” and
you can immediately edit the Item properties.

Delete:
Delete the selected item. You cannot delete an Item if it is the last one in the
list, but trying to delete it causes that all properties in the Item will be cleared.

1.6 Tabular View

This view shows the data in a tabular form.

You can select entire rows or columns by clicking on one of the grey cells.
Data can be cut and pasted freely.

The time column is greyed out for equidistant axis, as editing the time has no
meaning in that case.

The time is shown in the default windows format selected on your computer.
You can change this by editing the regional settings in the windows control
panel.

You can move around in the table by using the arrow buttons or the TAB or
ENTER keys. If the TAB and ENTER key is pressed at the right most column,
the active cell is moved to the first column in the next line. This can be used
to quickly enter data in a typewriter fashion. SHIFT+TAB or SHIFT+ENTER
works the other way. If you are at the bottom right cell of the table and press
TAB or ENTER, a new row is added. The time is extrapolated from the previ-
ous values and the item values are empty.

The currently selected cell can also be seen in the Graphical View as a
square around the value that corresponds to it.

1.7 Graphical View

This view presents the data graphically.

By pressing the right mouse button a pop-up menu is displayed. This menu
can be used to zoom, enable options, customize the representation, select
sub-sets are select which items are shown.

You can know the precise point where the mouse pointer is positioned look-
ing at the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen.

36 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Graphical View

1.7.1 Zoom

You can zoom in and out on the data shown, use previous zoom, use next
zoom or refresh the view using the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Previous Zoom, Next
Zoom and Refresh commands accessible from the menu that pops up right
clicking on the view, from the View menu or even from the Zoom toolbar

The first icon represents the Zoom In command, the second one the Zoom
Out, The third one the Previous Zoom, the fourth one the Next Zoom and the
fifth one enables or disables the grid lines in the view, which is also accessi-
ble from the menu that pops up right clicking on the view.

When you zoom in, scroll bars are displayed at the bottom and right hand
side of the view. You can pan by moving the scroll bars.

1.7.2 Editing modes

Data can be edited graphically by using four modes:

 Select points: allows you to select points. When clicking in a point that
point is selected. A red square around the point appears and the corre-
spondent cell in the Tabular View is selected

 Move points: allows you to move points. When the mouse pointer is near
a point, the pointer becomes a moving cross and you can move the point
by moving the mouse pointer while keeping the left button of the mouse
down (drag)

 Insert points: allows you to insert new points in the data set just by posi-
tioning the mouse pointer where the new point shall be located and click
the left button. When this mode is enabled, the mouse pointer becomes
a pencil. It’s only possible to select this mode in a Non Equidistant Axis
type.

 Delete points: allows you to delete points. When this mode is selected,
when the mouse pointer is near a point, the pointer becomes a rubber
and clicking on the left button of the mouse, deletes the point. The point
is not deleted from the data but its value is set to empty.

You can select these four modes through the pop-up menu, the Edit menu or
using the Mode Toolbar

Powering Water Decisions 37

 Time Series Editor

The first icon enables the Select Points Mode, the second one enables the
Move Points Mode, the third one enables the Insert Points Mode and the
fourth one enables the Delete Points Mode.

When a file is opened, all items contained in the file are by default plotted.
The title contained in the file is used as an header and the item names are
displayed in the upper left hand corner of the plot.

If data are associated with a calendar axis, the date and hour is plotted at
appropriate intervals. If data are associated with a relative axis, a normal X
axis is shown.

The axes are scaled automatically so all data presented are shown.

1.7.3 Graphical and font settings

The appearance of the text and graphics can be controlled through the graph-
ics and font commands in the Settings menu or the pop-up menu.

In the graphics settings, you can select which point style (or no point at all)
you want to use for each item, which line style (or no line at all) you want to
use to connect the points and the text format to apply to the points labels (if
desired).

In the font settings, you can select the font, font style, size, font effects and
font colour to use in the legends.

Please refer to Graphical Settings Dialog and Font Settings Dialog

1.7.4 TS Types graphical representation

The representation of the data depends on the TS Type of the items.

 Instantaneous: Points are connected by lines. Empty data (delete values)

are marked at the x-axis.

 Accumulated: The same as Instantaneous. However, an Accumulated

time series shall be always and increasing line.

 Step Accumulated: A line is drawn from the x-axis previous time step till
the point.

 Mean Step Accumulated: A line is drawn from the previous time step till
the current time step with the value at current time step

 Reverse Mean Step Accumulated: A line is drawn from the current time
step till the next time step with the value at current time step

38 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Graphical Settings Dialog

1.8 Graphical Settings Dialog

This dialog is used to change the settings of the graphical view.

On the left hand side, the dialog shows the items organized in a tree struc-
ture. Each item has branches for points, lines and labels. By selecting a
branch it’s settings can be changed in the right hand side of the dialog.

For points, you can select the point mark, the point mark colour, the point
mark fill style and the point mark size and you can also enable/disable the
point marks.

For lines, you can select the line style, the line colour, the line fill style and the
line thickness and you can also enable/disable lines.

For labels, you can select the text justification, the text colour, the text back-
ground style and you can also enable/disable labels.

It is also possible to control if items are displayed or not by using the right
mouse button on top of the item name in the tree structure.

1.9 Font Settings Dialog

This dialog is used to change the settings of the font to use in the graphical
view.

Powering Water Decisions 39

 Time Series Editor

You can select the font, font style, font size, font effect like strike out, under-
line and colour and the script (language resource) to use for special charac-
ters.

1.10 File Formats

The Time Series Editor supports multiple file formats for import and export.

Note that files can be converted from one format to the other, i.e. saved in a
different format than they opened in, but with restrictions (see below).

DFS:
This format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic time varying
data. Both zero, one, two and three dimensional data can be stored, although
only zero dimensional data is relevant for the time series editor.

Files saved in this format must have the extension .dfs0 or .dfs. dt0 is also
allowed, since it is the old time series file format.

Simple ASCII:
This is a generic text format which can be produced by almost any spread-
sheet or text editors. Only non-equidistant calendar axis data can be saved in
this format. Files must have the following format:

Title
Time Itemname 1 Itemname 2
Unit 100182 1003 2 100256 1800 1
1996-12-24 18:00:00 1.23 2.34
1996-12-24 18:30:00 1.44 3.38
1996-12-24 19:00:00 2.12 4.63
etc...

The first line contains the title.

40 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tools

The second line contains the string “Time” followed by the name of the items.
The list is separated with tabs.

The third line is optional. It contains the string "Unit" followed by three values
per item specifying unit item type, unit type, and time series values type, usu-
ally as a result of a previous export.

Each of the following lines contain data for one time step. Each line consists
of a date and time followed by one field for each of the data items.

The date and time format follows the ISO standard 8601, which is YYYY-
MM-DD HH:MM:SS. Between the date and time there can be a 'Space' or the
letter 'T'. Following the time there must be a Tab and each of the data items
must be separated by Tabs.

Note, that the date and time format shown in the example above is not the
same as in the tabular view, and therefore you cannot paste the example data
into that view.

Files saved in this format can have any extension except .dfs0 and .dfs.

1.11 Tools
This is a set of tools available to work with the time series data.

 Calculator can be applied for several calculations on the data.

 Interpolation can interpolate missing values (delete values) in the data.
 You can select a sub-set of the data to work with using the Select Sub-
Set tool.
 You can see statistical information of the data using the Statistics tool.

Tools are accessible through the Tools menu or by clicking on the desired tool
icon on the Tools Toolbar:

1.11.1 Calculator

Calculator tool is used to set item’s data based on calculations.

You can access Calculator tool from Calculator in the Tools menu or by click-
ing the Calculator icon in the Tools Toolbar (the second icon in the Tools Tool-
bar).

Powering Water Decisions 41

 Time Series Editor

Here you can specify the calculation to make and which Item to set the calcu-
lated data in.

Target Item specified which item will have the data set based on the calcula-
tion specified. Item is specified by ‘i’ followed by the number of the item
sequence in the time series.

You can insert a Operand, which basically, is an item. the value of the Oper-
and item is then used to make the calculations of each of the time steps (all
time steps in the item or all the time steps in the current Sub-Set that you can
specify).

You can also insert an Operand which basically is + for addition, - for subtrac-
tion, * for multiplication and / for division as well as a mathematical function
from the functions list.
Note that values in trigonometric functions are defined in degrees.

As an example, if you select the target item as item 2, then insert item 3 as
Operand, then insert Operator +, then insert item 4 as Operand, then insert
Operator /, then insert function cos and finally insert item 1 as Operand, you
should get the final expression of i2 = i3 + i4 / cos(i1).

You can also specify a Sub-Set where the calculation will be made, using the
tab Sub-Series that appears when you select Current Sub-Set. Please refer
to Select Sub-Set.

1.11.2 Interpolation

Interpolation tool is used to interpolate missing values (delete values).

You can access Interpolation tool from Interpolation in the Tools menu or by
clicking the Interpolation icon in the Tools Toolbar (the fourth icon in the Tools
Toolbar).

42 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tools

You can choose where to interpolate. If you select Entire Data-Set, the inter-
polation will be done in the entire data of the currently selected item (the one
that corresponds to the current cell selected in the Tabular View).

If you select Current Sub-Set, the interpolation will be done in the Current
Sub-Set. You can also select at this moment the Sub-Set to use, using the tab
Sub-Series that appears when you select Current Sub-Set. Please refer to
Select Sub-Set.

You can also specify which items to interpolate, using the Item Range tab that
appears when Current Sub-Set is enable in the Interpolation Dialog. Please
refer to Select Sub-Set.

In the Interpolation tab you can also select how the data is interpreted. Since
each TS Type has a different physical meaning, the interpolation is handled in
a different way for all the 4 types. Only Instantaneous, Accumulated, Step
Accumulated and Mean Step Accumulated TS Types are supported.

NOTE: An item with an item type describing directional data, e.g. Wind Direc-
tion, is automatically interpolated using a circular interpolation method when
the data is interpreted as Instantaneous.

You can also specify the maximum allowed gaps (missing values) so that
interpolation is done. Activating Use Max. Gap length you can specify the
maximum allowed gap duration. If a gap bigger than the length specified is
found, interpolation will not be done for this time step(s).

1.11.3 Select Sub-Set

Select sub-Set is used to specify a sub-Set of the data to work with.

You can access Select sub-Set tool from Select Sub-Set in the Tools menu,
by clicking the Select Sub-Set icon in the Tools Toolbar (the first icon in the

Powering Water Decisions 43

 Time Series Editor

Tools Toolbar) or by selecting Select Sub-Set from the menu that pops up
right clicking on the Graphical View.

Here you can specify the time where the Sub-Set begins and the time where
the Sub-Set ends or, alternatively, the time step where the Sub-Set begins
and the time step where the Sub-Set ends. Clicking on the Select All button,
selects the entire data set.

Clicking on the tab Item Range you can also specify which items belong to
the Sub-Set.

1.11.4 Statistics

Statistics tool is used to view statistical information for all the items in the time
series data set.

You can access Statistics tool from Statistics in the Tools menu or by clicking
the Statistics icon in the Tools Toolbar (the third icon in the Tools Toolbar).

44 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tools

On the Statistics dialog, you can see the all item Names, all item Minimum
values, all item Maximum values, all item Mean values, all item Standard
Deviation values and the number of missing values (delete values) for the
Entire Data-Set.

You can also specify use Sub-Set clicking on the Current Sub-Set. To specify
a different Sub-Set, please refer to Select Sub-Set.

1.11.5 Edit Custom Blocks

This tool can be used to edit the custom blocks of a file. Custom blocks are
data in dfs files where miscellaneous information about the file is kept.

Powering Water Decisions 45

 Time Series Editor

46 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 PROFILE SERIES EDITOR

Powering Water Decisions 47

48 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Create a New Dataset

2 Introduction
The appearance of the Profile Series Editor differs if you create a new (blank)
profile series compared to opening an existing data (*.dfs1) file.

Creating a new profile (or line) series requires specification of properties for
the profile series file, and the File Properties dialog is therefore opened in this
case.

If you are opening an existing profile series data file, the data are immediately
presented in the Profile Series data dialog where data can be viewed and
edited both in a graphical and in a tabular view. In this case, if you wish to
change the already defined file properties, it is required to open the File Prop-
erties dialog from the graphical view.

You operate the Profile Series Editor from the main menu, the tool bar icons,
or by right-clicking on the graphical view.

2.1 Create a New Dataset

To create a new dataset containing a 1D profile, go to File New and select
Profile Series under the MIKE Zero heading. This will open the New Profile
Series Dialog (p. 51).

2.2 Open an Existing Dataset

To open an existing dataset, go to File Open and select the file format that
you are looking for. If you double-click a file in the Windows Explorer with a
file format associated with the Profile Editor, then the editor will open and load
the data ready for editing.

2.3 Editing the Dataset

When you have selected the dataset to edit, the editor is ready to work. Simi-
lar to other MIKE Zero DFS editors, such as the Time Series Editor and the
Grid Editor, the Profile Editor has two views, a graphical view and a tabular
view. A movable splitter bar allowing you to adjust the relative sizes of the two
views separates these views.

2.4 Further help

Further help can be found for the following topics in the follow sections:

Tabular View- about the tabular view of the data

Graphical View- about the graphical view of the data

Powering Water Decisions 49

 Introduction

Navigation View - about modifying the tabular view

File Formats - about file formats

Import from ASCII File - about importing data from ASCII

Export to ASCII File- about importing data from ASCII

Tools
Calculator- transform the data using expressions that involve the data itself,
the time step etc.

Interpolation- fill blank values

Edit Custom Blocks- change or create custom blocks

50 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

New Profile Series Dialog

3 Properties

3.1 New Profile Series Dialog

This dialog is used to create a new Profile Series.

It is possible to create a "Blank" data set, import from ASCII file or select from
a number of pre-defined templates containing different sets of properties.

Figure 3.1 New Profile Series dialog

If you chose "Blank T1 Document", the File Properties Dialog is displayed

with a set of default properties. You can then customize the profile series
according to your own needs.

If you choose “From ASCII File”, the import from ascii Dialog is displayed
where you can set the properties to import from ascii.

If you choose a “Template”, the File Properties Dialog is displayed with a set
of properties specific to this template. It may not be possible to edit all of the
properties. The following templates are available:

Cross-shore profile
Pier Resistance Profile
ADCP Vector Plot

3.1.1 Cross-shore profile

The origin of the cross-shore profile is positioned at a chosen water depth,

approaching the shoreline along an axis which is perpendicular to the depth
contours.The cross-shore profile template creates a profile series with the fol-
lowing pre-defined properties:

Powering Water Decisions 51

 Properties

 Equidistant Calendar Axis

 1 Time step
 10 seconds time step
 10 Grid points
 1 meter Grid Step
 Orientation: 0 deg.N
 5 Items:

1: Bathymetry (m)
2: Bed roughness (m)
3: Non-erodible bed (m)
4: Mean grain diameter, d50 (mm)
5: Geometrical Spreading ((d84/d16))

The Start time is the time of creating the file. Internally the DATA TYPE
Parameter is set to 101.

You cannot edit the number of time steps, the number of items and the item
definitions.

Note: The (LITPACK) orientation of the coastline (deg.N) is automatically

saved in the first value of the M21_Misc custom block when the data file is
created in the profile editor. The coastline orientation should be defined as
opposite to the actual orientation of the line.

It is always possible to customize the data set. When the data set has been
created, you can right-click in the graphical view and select "Properties". The
File Properties Dialog is displayed, and all the properties can be edited.

3.1.2 Pier Resistance Profile

This file describes the parameters necessary for including the resistance
effect from a pier into the hydraulic simulation. A pier data file is a profile data
file where the number of time steps in fact is the number of piers, i.e. the time
axis in the data file is not a true time axis. In the same way, the spatial axis is
not a true spatial axis, but merely a collection of data describing the pier. The
pier data file has the layout depicted in Figure 3.2.

52 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

New Profile Series Dialog

Figure 3.2 Layout of pier data file

The Pier Resistance template creates a profile series with the following pre-
defined properties:

 Equidistant Calendar Axis with 1 time step and 10 seconds time step
The Start time is the time of creating the file.

 Internally the DATA TYPE Parameter is set to 800.

 10 grid points with 1 meter grid step to be used when defining the pier
position and pier layout.

It is always possible to customize the data set. When the data set has been
created, you can right-click in the graphical view and select "Properties". The
File Properties Dialog is displayed, and all the properties can be edited.

The x- and y-coordinates must be specified as map projection coordinates,

e.g. UTM-33 coordinates. The map projection is defined by the Geographical
Information in the data file.

Please see the HD Reference Manual in the MIKE 21 Flow Model, Hydrody-
namic Module, User Guide for further description of the pier data.

3.1.3 ADCP Vector Plot

This file describes velocity components formatted for plotting in the ADCP 2D
Plot option. Each grid step denotes a measuring point where the velocity is
measured at one specific level.

The ADCP Vector Plot template creates a profile series with the following pre-
defined properties:

 Equidistant Calendar Axis

 1 Time step
 10 seconds time step
 1 meter Grid Step

Powering Water Decisions 53

 Properties

 5 Items:
1: Offset (seconds)
2: Easting (m)
3: Northing (m)
4: u-velocity component (m/s)
5: v-velocity component (m/s)

Internally the DATA TYPE Parameter is set to 901.

The Start time must be defined as the start of the survey time. The actual time
of the measurement is then defined by the start time plus the offset given in
item 1.

It is always possible to customize the data set. When the data set has been
created, you can right-click in the graphical view and select "Properties". The
File Properties Dialog is displayed, and all the properties can be edited.

3.2 Geographical Information

The Geographical Information dialog is used to set the geographical position
and orientation of the profile line, as well as the projection zone.

Note: The orientation given in the Geographical Information dialog only refers
to the orientation of the profile line and will not be the same as the orientation
that is defined for certain pre-defined LITPACK file types.

3.3 File Properties Dialog

This dialog is used to view and change the properties of the profile series
being visualized.

54 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Properties Dialog

3.3.1 General Information

Title:
The title for the data contained in the file. Any text can be typed here

3.3.2 Axis Information

Axis Type:
The type of the time axis. You can select between the following types:

 Equidistant Calendar Axis: Data is stored with a fixed time interval and
start at an absolute date and time.

 Equidistant Relative Axis: Data is stored with a fixed time interval, but do
not have a absolute start date and time. The start time is not applicable in
this case.

Start Time:
The start time of the data. This is only relevant for calendar axis data. The for-
mat used is the standard windows format. To change this edit the regional
settings in the windows control panel.

Time Step:
The time step for the data. Only relevant when the time axis is equidistant
(Equidistant Calendar Axis or Equidistant Time Axis). You can specify days,
hour:minute:second and milliseconds. A time step of one hour would thus be
given as “01:00:00” in the [hour:min:sec] input box.

Powering Water Decisions 55

 Properties

No. of Time steps:

Number of time steps. If this number is changed, time steps are added or
removed as appropriate at the end of the time series. When adding time
steps, the new time steps added will be filled with an empty value, meaning
that no value has been inserted.

Number of Grid Points:

If this number is changed, grid steps are added or removed as appropriate at
the end of the profile series. When adding grid points, the new grid points will
be filled with an empty value, meaning that no value has been inserted.

Grid Step:
The grid step for the data. The unit is meters.

3.3.3 Item Information

Name:
Text that identifies the item.

Type:
The type of the data contained in the item, indicating if it is e.g. a water level,
wave height, etc. It is possible to select from a number of types using the
combo box which appears if you click in the field. If a type not contained in the
list is needed, write the type in the text field. This also applies to the unit
below.

Unit:
Text that identifies the unit of the item. Unit is always related to the type. It is
possible to select from a number of units using the combo box which appears
if you click in the field. If a unit not contained in the list is needed, write the
unit in the text field.

Min.:
Minimum value for all data in the item. This value is not editable since it’s
based on statistical information of the Item.

Max.:
Maximum value for all data in the item. This value is not editable since it’s
based on statistical information of the Item.

Insert:
Insert an item before the selected one. This item will be named “Untitled” and
you can immediately edit the Item properties.

Append:
Append an item at the end of the list. This item will be named “Untitled” and
you can immediately edit the Item properties.

56 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tabular View

Delete:
Delete the selected item. You cannot delete an Item if it is the last one in the
list, but trying to delete it causes that all properties in the Item will be cleared.

3.4 Tabular View

This view shows the data in a tabular form.

You can select entire rows or columns by clicking on one of the grey cells.
Data can be cut and pasted freely. You can move around in the table by using
the arrow buttons or the TAB or ENTER keys.

The time column is greyed out, as editing the time has no meaning in an equi-
distant time axis.

The time is shown in the default windows format selected on your computer.
You can change this by editing the regional settings in the windows control
panel.

The currently selected cell can also be seen in the Graphical View (p. 57) as
a square around the value that corresponds to it.

The tabular view per default shows all time steps for one item. In the Naviga-
tion View dialog under ‘Options’ you can select to show all items for one time
step.

3.4.1 Cell format

You can define how to display the values in the Tabular View by setting the
cell style:

 General
The cell format is chosen as the most optimal with largest detail
 Fixed
Value is shown as a decimal number with a fixed number of decimals
 Scientific
Value is shown in scientific mode with a defined number of digits

3.5 Graphical View

This view presents the data graphically.

By pressing the right mouse button a pop-up menu is displayed. This menu
can be used to zoom, enable options, customize the representation, select
sub-sets are select which items are shown.

Powering Water Decisions 57

 Properties

3.5.1 Zoom

You can zoom in and out on the data shown, use previous zoom, use next
zoom or refresh the view using the Zoom In, Zoom Out, Previous Zoom, Next
Zoom and Refresh commands accessible from the menu that pops up right
clicking on the view, from the View menu or even from the Zoom toolbar.

When you zoom in, scroll bars are displayed at the bottom and right hand
side of the view. You can pan by moving the scroll bars.

3.5.2 Graphical and font settings

The appearance of the text and graphics can be controlled through the graph-
ics and font commands in the Settings menu or the pop-up menu.

In the graphics settings, you can select which point style (or no point at all)
you want to use for each item, which line style (or no line at all) you want to
use to connect the points and the text format to apply to the points labels (if
desired).

In the font settings, you can select the font, font style, size, font effects and
font colour to use in the legends.

3.6 Navigation View

The navigation dialog is used to position the editor at the desired item for all
time steps or at the desired time step for all items. Simply choose the wanted
item and time step and close. If you want to switch to another view, click the
appropriate view at the bottom of the dialog.

3.7 File Formats

The Profile Series Editor supports two file formats, the DFS Format and
ASCII.

58 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Formats

Note that files can be converted from one format to the other, i.e. saved in a
different format than they opened in, but with restrictions.

3.7.1 DFS

This format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic time varying

data. Both zero, one, two and three dimensional data can be stored, although
only zero dimensional data is relevant for the time series editor.

Files saved in this format must have the extension .dfs1 or .dfs. dt1 is also
allowed, since it is the old profile series file format.

3.7.2 ASCII

This is a general format which can be generated by most spread sheets or

text editors. The first part of an ASCII File must contains the Header Informa-
tion. An example of a Header Information is given below:

Title wave conditions along local boundary

Dim 1
Geo PROJCS["UTM-32",GEOGCS[... ]] 54.9906 5.95184 7.5026
Time 1998-10-06 01:00:00 30 86400
NoGridPoints 8
Spacing 2000
NoStaticItems 0
NoDynamicItems 4
Item Hm0 [m] Wave height meter
Item Tm [s] Wave period second
Item MWD [deg] Wave direction degree
Item DSD [deg] Standard deviation, DSD degree
NoCustomBlocks 1
M21_Misc 1 7 0 -1E-030 -900 10 -1E-030 -1E-030 -1E-030
Delete -1E-030
DataType 0
<Empty line>

The lines in the Header Information must appear in this order and fields must
be separated with tabs. The first item in the lines of the Header Information is
a string, i.e. 'Title', ‘Dim’, ‘Geo’, 'Time’, etc. The Header Information ends with
an empty line.

The lines specify the following:

Title: optional string identifier

Dim: Dimension of file (always 1 for profile series)
Geo: Map projection, origin longitude, origin latitude and orientation
Time: Time Axis Description i.e. Start Date yyyy-mm-dd, Start Time,
number of Time Steps and Time Interval in seconds

Powering Water Decisions 59

 Properties

NoGridPoints: number of grid points along spatial axis

Spacing: grid spacing
NoStaticItems: number of static items
NoDynamicItems: number of dynamic items
Item: Name, Type, Unit (these can be left unspecified)
NoCustomBlocks: number of custom blocks
Custom block description: name, custom block number, number of ele-
ments, element values
Delete: The Delete value should be a number not typical of the data
DataType: dedicated data type for certain applications

Data follows after the Header Information and must be arranged in blocks.
Each block represent one time step. An example of a data block is shown
below:
tstep 0
0.483734 3.11164 107.877 31.5283
0.484118 3.11231 107.92 31.5208
0.484501 3.11299 107.962 31.5133
0.484883 3.11368 108.004 31.5058
0.485263 3.11438 108.046 31.4983
0.485643 3.11508 108.087 31.4908
0.486021 3.11579 108.128 31.4833
0.486399 3.11651 108.169 31.4757
<Empty line>

The items can be stored in two ways:

 Items as columns (as shown above)

This way the values for grid step 0 for the items are shown in the top row,
the grid step number increase downwards.
Note: each item value must be succeeded by a tab.

 Items as rows
This way the values for grid step 0 for the items are shown in the left col-
umn, the grid step number increase to the right

Files saved in this format can have any extension although dfs1, dfs and .dt1
should be avoided.

3.8 Import from ASCII File

This tool can be used to import profile data from an ASCII File and convert it
into a DFS File ( *.dfs1 and *.dt1). The DFS File format is developed by DHI
for storage of bathymetric and hydrodynamic data.

60 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Export to ASCII File

These files typically contain model grids, hydrodynamic data, model results
etc.

To import profile data, go to ' File', ' New' and select ' Profile Series' under the
MIKE Zero heading. This will open the ' New File' dialog. Choose 'From ASCII
File', and press 'OK'.

3.8.1 File to Import

On the 'Import From ASCII' dialog select the ASCII File from which you wish
to import the data. The ASCII File must have a certain format in order to be
read correctly, see File Formats (p. 58).

Choose whether the items are presented in rows or columns.

3.8.2 Completion and Editing

To complete the importing of data press 'OK'. Thereafter the new DFS File is
shown with the Profile Editor. Here you can edit data and finally save the DFS
File.

3.9 Export to ASCII File

You can Export a Profile File in DFS Format to an ASCII File. For further
description of Profile File Formats, see File Formats (p. 58).

Open the DFS File (*.dfs1 or *.dfs) in the Profile Editor. Go to 'File' and
'Export to ASCII'. In the pop-up window you can specify where the ASCII File
should be saved and under which File Name.

Also choose whether the items are presented in rows or columns.

Powering Water Decisions 61

 Properties

62 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Calculator

4 Tools

4.1 Calculator
This tool can be used to assign values or apply mathematical expressions to
a selected interval of time steps and spatial data for the active item. The
active item can be selected under the View menu under Items.

4.1.1 Edit Expression

This is where you construct the expression for the calculation. The way the
expression is built depends on whether the expression should work on a sin-
gle or multiple time steps. If the expression should work on only a single time
step, the expression can be built by selecting first the target item, which is the
location of the results of the calculation. You can then select either:

 insert an operator (add, subtract, multiply or divide), or

 insert an operand (the time step row of the data series t1, t2, ...tn), or
 insert a function (i.e. sine, cosine, tangent, etc.).

As you build the expression, it will be shown in the "Current Expression" field
where you can further modify the expression manually.

If the expression should work on multiple time steps, the target and operand
are not selectable, but should always be "t" - the operand could also be "n" for
the position in the profile.

Once you are familiar with the calculator functions you can create the expres-
sion directly in the "Current Expression" field. The drop down arrow to the
right of the field allows you to re-use and modify previously constructed
expressions.

Sample expression #1: t3=t2-t1

This expression subtracts the values stored in time step 1 from the values
stored in time step 2 and place the results in time step 3. This operation will
be performed for the grid points which have been selected on the sub set dia-
log.

Sample expression #2: t2=3.14159

This expression would assigns all values stored in time step 2 to be equal to
3.14159. This operation will be performed for each grid point which has been
selected in the sub-series.

Powering Water Decisions 63

 Tools

Sample expression #3: t=t*3 +2.01

This expression calculates the given expression for all the selected time
steps. If t1 and t2 are selected - the expression gives the same result, as exe-
cuting both t1=t1*3+2.01 and t2=t2*2.01. This operation will be performed for
each grid point which has been selected on the sub set dialog.

Sample expression #4: t=n

This expression assigns all values stored in the selected time steps to be
equal to the number of the position in the profile. This operation will be per-
formed for each grid point which has been selected on the sub set dialog.

4.1.2 Sub set

On this dialog you select the range of time steps and grid points for which the
expression should be executed.

You can either enter a starting and ending grid point number or select all data
("Select All" button).

You can either enter a starting and ending time step number or select all data
"Select All" button). The "Select Current" button will select only the time step
currently active in the view.

4.2 Interpolation
This tool can be used to fill data cells which contain missing values by inter-
polating in time or space between the nearest non-missing data cells for the
active data item. The item is activated under the View menu under items.

4.2.1 Gap filling

Interpolate on
First select the data set and item range over which you want the interpolation
function performed. If you choose "Entire Data Set" all data will be gap fill
interpolated in either time or space. Otherwise, if you choose "Current Sub-
set", only the selected grid points for the active item will be operated on.

Interpolation Type
Depending on the type of data, the interpolation can be handled in two ways.
The data can be interpolated in:

 Spatial dimension
 Time dimension

64 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Edit Custom Blocks

Interpolating in space can be useful if you have two or more water level
measurement at two or more gird points, and you want to interpolate the
water level for the grid points in between.

4.2.2 Sub-set

On these dialogs you select the range of time steps and grid points for which
the Interpolation/Gap filling should be performed.

You can either enter a starting and ending grid point number or select all data
("Select All" button).

You can either enter a starting and ending time step number or select all data
"Select All" button).

4.3 Edit Custom Blocks

This tool can be used to create and edit custom blocks in the file. For some
MIKE Zero applications element 1 in the first custom block defines the geo-
graphical orientation of the bathymetry.

Powering Water Decisions 65

 Tools

66 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 GRID SERIES EDITOR

Powering Water Decisions 67

68 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Create a New Dataset

5 Introduction
The appearance of the Grid Series Editor differs if you create a new (blank)
time series compared to opening an existing data (*.dfs2) file.

Creating a new grid (or matrix) series requires specification of properties for
the grid series file, and the File Properties dialog is therefore opened in this
case.

If you are opening an existing grid series data file, the data are immediately
presented in the Grid Series data dialog where data can be viewed and
edited both in a graphical and in a tabular view. You cannot directly change
the already defined file properties of a grid series.

You operate the Grid Series Editor from the main menu, the tool bar icons, or
by right-clicking on the graphical view.

5.1 Create a New Dataset

To create a new dataset containing a 2D or a 3D grid, go to File New and
select Grid Series under the MIKE Zero heading. This will open the New Grid
Dialog shown below.

Figure 5.1 New Grid dialog

By selecting Blank Grid you must define the grid parameters as described in
the section New Grid Series File (p. 73).

By selecting From ASCII File you must follow the instructions given in section
Import from ASCII File (p. 75).

Powering Water Decisions 69

 Introduction

By selecting From Dfsu File you must follow the instructions described in the
section Import from Dfsu File (p. 76).

5.2 Open an Existing Dataset

To open an existing dataset, go to File Open and select the file format that
you are looking for. If you double-click a file in the Windows Explorer with a
file format associated with the Grid Editor, then the editor will open and load
the data ready for editing.

5.3 Editing the Dataset

When you have selected the dataset to edit, the editor is ready to work. Simi-
lar to other MIKE Zero DFS editors, such as the Time Series Editor and the
Profile Editor, the Grid Editor has two views, a graphical view and a tabular
view. A movable splitter bar allowing you to adjust the relative sizes of the two
views separates these views.

5.4 Further help

Further help can be found for the following topics:

 Graphical View (p. 86) - about the graphical view of the data
 Tabular View (p. 85) - about the tabular view of the data
 New Grid Series File (p. 73) dialog - to create a new dataset

Tools
 Navigation (p. 91) - to navigate in the dataset in time and how to select
an item
 Set Value (p. 95) - to assign a value to a selection of grid cells
 Filter (p. 94) - to filter a selection of data (e.g. smooth the data)
 Crop (p. 100) - to discard some of the data and keep the rest
 Calculator (p. 95) - transform the data using expressions that involve the
data itself, the time step etc.
 Interpolation (p. 93) - fill blank values
 Copy File into Data (p. 98) - import data from another dataset
 Toolbars (p. 88) - the Windows toolbars associated with the Grid Editor

70 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Formats

6 File

6.1 File Formats

The Grid Editor supports two file formats, the DFS format and ASCII.

Note that files can be converted from one format to the other, i.e. saved in a
different format than they opened in, but with restrictions.

6.1.1 DFS format

This format is developed by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic data saved in

grids. Both one, two and three dimensional data can be stored, although only
two and three dimensional data are relevant for the grid editor.

Files saved in this format must have the extension *.dfs2, *.dfs3, *.dt2 and
*.dt3.

6.1.2 ASCII format

This is a general format which can be generated by most spread sheets or

text editors. The first part of an ASCII File must contains the Header Informa-
tion. An example of a Header Information is given below:

Title Example of Import from ASCII File

Dim 3
Geo UTM -1.20 37.32 -35.40
Time EquidistantTimeAxis 2000-05-03 00:00:00 2 30.00
NoGridPoints 6 4 5
Spacing 200.00 200.00 1
NoStaticItems 1
Item Bathymetry Undefined Undefined
NoDynamicItems 2
Item H (m) waterdepth Water level meter
Item Q (m**3/s/m) flux Flow Flux m^3/s/m
Delete -1E-030
<Empty line>

The lines in the Header Information must appear in this order and fields must
be separated with tabs. The first item in the lines of the Header Information is
a string, i.e. 'Title', 'Dim', 'Geo' etc. The Header Information ends with an
empty line.

The lines specify the following:

Title
Dimension: Can be either 2 or 3.

Powering Water Decisions 71

 File

Geographic Information: UTM-zone, origin longitude, origin latitude

and orientation.
Time Information: A Time Axis Description, Start Date yyyy-mm-dd,
Start Time, number of Time Steps and Time Interval in seconds.
Grid Information: Number of Grid points in first, second and third
dimension.
Number of Static Items (a Static Item is data related to time series data,
but not a part if it. For example, the bathymetry in a file from a HD-run
with H, P Q as Dynamic Items).
Static Items: Name, Type, Unit (these can be left unspecified).
Number of Dynamic Items.
Dynamic Item: Name, Type, Unit (these can be left unspecified)
Delete value: The Delete value should be a number not typical of the
data

Data follows after the Header Information and must be arranged in blocks. An
example of a data block is shown below:

tstep 187 item 1 layer 0

20 20.0313 21.093 21.1076 21.2892 -1E-030
20 20.2856 21.1294 21.1587 21.2748 -1E-030
-1E-030 -1E-030 -1E-030 21.0826 21.2092 -1E-030
-1E-030 -1E-030 -1E-030 20.8634 20.8749 -1E-030
<Empty line>

The first data blocks must contain the Static Items. The Dynamic Items follow
and must be presented in the following order:

tstep 0 item 1 layer 0

tstep 0 item 1 layer 1 - until all layers are specified
tstep 0 item 2 layer 0
tstep 0 item 2 layer 1 - until all Dynamic Items are specified
tstep 1 item 1 layer 0
Etc.

Files saved in this format can have any extension although dfs2, dfs3, dfs, dt2
and dt3 should be avoided.

6.1.3 Grid State Format

You can save your grid file as a Grid State File (.gsf). This will save your nor-
mal grid file together with extra information about a specific palette and back-
ground layers if any.

72 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

New Grid Series File

Figure 6.1 Example of saved grid file in gsf-format as interpreted by the grid editor.

6.2 New Grid Series File

The new-dialog is used to create new 2D and 3D grids. A wizard takes you
through five steps to input the basic information needed to define the grid.

6.2.1 Step 1: Select the type of grid to be created

2D and 3D refer to the number of dimensions of the grid in space. Both types
of grids can have one or more time steps, see step 3.

6.2.2 Step 2: Specify the projection, the geographical position of the origin of
the dataset and the orientation

The map projection defines the local coordinate system/rectangular area in

which the data is specified. It is best to select a map projection that result in a
minimum of distortion of the spatial data.

The coordinates of the origin may be defined in two ways:

 Geographical coordinates specified by longitude and latitude

 Map projection coordinates specified by Easting and Northing

The two specification modes are linked such that e.g. when modifying the ori-
gin using the Map projection values, the Geographical coordinates will auto-
matically be updated accordingly.

Powering Water Decisions 73

 File

The geographical position of the origin of the grid is defined as the centre
point in the first grid cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Figure 6.2 Definition of Origo

Note: If the map projection is defined as NON-UTM, the origo is defined as

the lower left corner of cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Furthermore, the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified. This is
defined as the angle between true north and the y-axis of the grid measured
clockwise. A mnemonic way of remembering this definition is by thinking of
NYC, which normally means New York City, but which for our purpose means
"from North to the Y-axis Clockwise", see the figure below.

Figure 6.3 Definition of grid orientation

6.2.3 Step 3: Specify the temporal and spatial properties

To define the temporal properties you need to specify:

 the type of axis, only choice is equidistant, meaning a constant time step
between the grids

74 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import from ASCII File

 the time for the first grid

 the time step between the grids, given in seconds
 the number of time steps in the dataset

The spatial properties include:

 the number of grid points in each direction

 the grid spacing in meters in each direction. The grid spacing is constant
in each direction, but can vary between directions

6.2.4 Step 4: Specify the items to be included

The grid can contain several items. Give the item(s) a name and select the
item type from the list. A unit has been defined for each item type, and this
unit will automatically be set when choosing the item type. If you cannot find
the item type that you need, then use 'undefined'. Using the 'Insert', 'Append'
and 'Delete' options you can manage the list of items.

All values in the grid will be initially set to the delete value specified on this
page. This means that values that are not somehow filled later in the editing
process will have the delete value.

6.2.5 Step 5: Overview

Press 'Finish' to complete the initialisation process and start editing.

6.3 Import from ASCII File

This tool can be used to import grid data from an ASCII File and convert it into
a DFS File (*.dfs2, *.dfs3, *.dt2 and *.dt3). The DFS File format is developed
by DHI for storage of hydrodynamic data.

These files typically contain model grids, wind fields, model results etc.

To import grid data, go to ' File', ' New' and select ' Grid Series' under the
MIKE Zero heading. This will open the ' Grid Series' dialog. Choose 'From
ASCII File', and press 'OK'.

6.3.1 File to Import

On the 'Import From ASCII' dialog select the ASCII File from which you wish
to import the data. The ASCII File must have a certain format in order to be
read correctly.

Powering Water Decisions 75

 File

6.3.2 Completion and Editing

To complete the importing of data press 'OK'. Thereafter the new DFS File is
shown with the Grid Editor. Here you can edit data and finally save the DFS
File.

6.3.3 Hint

Creating a frame from an existing file can make it easier to create the header
for the ASCII file to be imported. Simply by exporting an existing file to ASCII
and change the relevant header information and include the actual data after
the header file.

Please notice that if the EUM Data Type and EUM Unit for an item does not
match according to the Unit Base Group definition, then the file cannot be
created.

6.4 Export to ASCII File

You can Export a Grid File in DFS Format to an ASCII File. For further
description of Grid File Formats, see File Formats (p. 71).

Open the DFS File (*.dfs2, *dfs3 or *.dfs) in the Grid Editor. Go to 'File' and
'Export to ASCII'. In the pop-up window you can specify where the ASCII File
should be saved and under which File Name.

6.5 Import from Dfsu File

This tool can be used to import grid data from a Dfsu File and convert it into a
DFS File (*.dfs2, *.dfs3, *.dt2 and *.dt3).

Note: You can only import dfsu files describing the horizontal domain. It is not
possible to create a dfs2 file from a dfsu file describing a vertical boundary.

6.5.1 Step 1: Select File to Import

On the 'Import from dfsu file' dialog select the Dfsu File from which you wish
to import the data.

6.5.2 Step 2: Specify geographical parameters

You must specify the geographical position of the origin of the new grid and
the orientation of the grid.

The projection of the geographical coordinate system is read from the Dfsu
file.

76 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Import from Dfsu File

6.5.3 Step 3: Specify the spatial properties

You must specify the number of grid points and the grid spacing in each direc-
tion, respectively.

The time axis properties is read from the Dfsu file.

6.5.4 Step 4: Specify land value

You must specify the minimum value that defines land.

The items are read from the Dfsu file.

6.5.5 Step 5: Completion and Editing

To complete the importing of data press 'Finish'. Thereafter the new DFS File
is shown with the Grid Editor. Here you can edit data and finally save the DFS
File.

6.5.6 Step 6: Modifying Custom Block

In case you want to apply bathymetry data within a geographical domain you
need to modify the third value in the M21_Misc custom block to -900 in order
for the program to recognize the map projection, see
MIKE 21 / MIKE 3 specific (p. 83).

Powering Water Decisions 77

 File

78 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Clipboard and object editing

7 Edit

7.1 Clipboard and object editing

Undo
Undo latest command.

Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies and pastes your selected data through the Windows clipboard.

Copy/Paste View
Copies and pastes the current view between different instances of Result
Viewer, Data Viewer, the Graphical overview tab in the FM Input Editor, Data
Manager and the Grid Series Editor.

Ctrl+Shift+C/Ctrl+Shift+V can be used as accelerator keys.

7.2 Geographical Information

This dialog is used to set the geographical position and orientation of the grid,
as well as the projection zone.

The map projection defines the local coordinate system/rectangular area in

which the data is specified. It is best to select a map projection that result in a
minimum of distortion of the spatial data.

The coordinates of the origin may be defined in two ways:

 Geographical coordinates specified by longitude and latitude

 Map projection coordinates specified by Easting and Northing

The two specification modes are linked such that e.g. when modifying the ori-
gin using the Map projection values, the Geographical coordinates will auto-
matically be updated accordingly.

The geographical position of the origin of the grid is defined as the centre
point in the first grid cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Powering Water Decisions 79

 Edit

Figure 7.1 Definition of Origo

Note: If the map projection is defined as NON-UTM, the origo is defined as

the lower left corner of cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Furthermore, the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified. This is
defined as the angle between true north and the y-axis of the grid measured
clockwise. A mnemonic way of remembering this definition is by thinking of
NYC, which normally means New York City, but which for our purpose means
"from North to the Y-axis Clockwise", see the figure below.

Figure 7.2 Definition of grid orientation

7.3 Time Steps

The Time Steps dialog is used to manage the time axis of the file.

80 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Time Steps

It is possible to specify the start date and time for the file as well as the time
step interval between the time steps.

7.3.1 Modifying Time Steps

Selecting time steps

It is possible to select time steps in the dialog by simply clicking on them in
the list, or by using the "Select" and/or "Invert" button. The number of
selected time steps are displayed next to the list.

Inserting time steps

1. Select the items in the list where the new items should be placed
before/after
2. Specify the number of items to insert before/after the selected time steps
3. Specify whether the new items should be inserted before or after the
selected items
4. Specify whether the new items should be filled with blanks (delete val-
ues) or a copy of the values from the selected items they are placed
before/after
5. Press the "Insert" button.

Removing time steps

To remove one or more time steps simply select them as described above
and press the "Remove" button.

Powering Water Decisions 81

 Edit

7.4 Items
The Items dialog is used to manage the items in the file.

The grid can contain several items. Give the item(s) a name and select the
item type from the list. A unit has been defined for each item type, and this
unit will automatically be set when choosing the item type. If you cannot find
the item type that you need, then use 'undefined'. Using the 'Insert', 'Append'
and 'Delete' options you can manage the list of items.

For new items all values in the grid will initially be set to the delete value
specified on this page. This means that values that are not somehow filled
later in the editing process will have the delete value.

7.4.1 Editing an existing file

Copy
1. Insert or append a new item.
2. Select the item (row) to copy by clicking on the left most (grey) cell and
press Ctrl+C.
3. Select the newly created item (row) by clicking on the left most (grey) cell
and press Ctrl+V.
The properties and values of the new item will be identical to the original item

82 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Spatial Axis

Delete value
It is not recommended to change the delete value in an existing file since all
un-specified values are set to the delete value. After a change, these values
will be interpreted as non-delete value.

7.5 Spatial Axis

The Spatial Axis dialog is used to manage the spatial axis of the file.

Each axis is defined by origin grid number, number of grid points and grid
spacing. It is not possible to edit the number of grid points for an existing grid
series file.

7.6 Edit Custom Blocks

This tool can be used to edit the custom blocks of a file. Custom blocks are
data in dfs files where miscellaneous information about the file is kept.

MIKE 21 / MIKE 3 specific

Most MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 data files have a custom block called "M21_Misc".
It is a block of 7 floats

 Item 1: orientation at origin relative to true north.

 Item 2: drying depth.

 Item 3: code for identifying whether or not the data contains geographical
information; it is -900 if it contains geographical information.

 Item 4: the zland value, the value above which bathymetric data (the data
itself in case of bathymetry data file; the prefix record containing the
bathymetry in other cases) is considered as land.

 Item 5-6: are more free and may have different meaning in different situ-
ations.

Powering Water Decisions 83

 Edit

84 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tabular View

8 View
The graphical view appears to the left-hand side of the Grid Editor editor. On
the right-hand-side you have the Tabular View.

You may adjust the relative size of the graphical view and the tabular view by
adjusting the splitter bar between the views.

8.1 Tabular View

The area that is viewed in the tabular view can be indicated in the Graphical
View by switching on the selection overlay.

The tabular view works like a simple spreadsheet:

 Click on a cell, and you can enter or modify a value

 Use the mouse or the arrows to highlight a block of cells. The use cut
(ctrl X), copy (ctrl C) and paste (ctrl V) as usual. These actions may be
reversed by using undo (ctrl Z)

 You can move around in the table by using the arrow buttons or the TAB
or ENTER keys. If the TAB and ENTER key is pressed at the right most
column, the active cell is moved to the first column in the next line. This
can be used to quickly enter data in a typewriter fashion. SHIFT+TAB or
ENTER works the other way

Cell Format
You can define the cell format by selecting Tabular View at the bottom of the
drop-down menu for View.

Powering Water Decisions 85

 View

Decimal point
Please note that the tabular view always represents numbers with a '.' as the
decimal point, regardless of which representation is used by the Windows
system. You should be aware of this when copying numbers to and from
other applications that may use a different notation.

8.2 Graphical View

In the graphical view you may manipulate the data using various tools. Inside
the graphical view you can zoom and pan. There are three ways of zooming
in and out: from the menu item View, from the standard toolbar, or clicking the
right mouse button while pointing at the graphical view. The last action will
bring up the following pop-up menu.

In 3D you may select the jk-plane, the jl-plane or the kl-plane by selecting the
appropriate property page at the bottom of the graphical view.

Graphical view settings

There are a number of graphical view attributes that can be set. These are
accessible from the menu item View.

8.3 Palette
The colour palette is used to specify the colours used for shading of the
graphical view according to contour levels. A palette may be created and
saved for later use.

If you want to save the palette together with the specific grid file, you can use
the Grid State Format (p. 72).

8.4 Overlay
A number of items can be laid over the graphical view for various purposes.
Many of these options are switched on and off.

86 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Grid Settings

 Grid - overlays a grid following the grid cells in the view

 Position of tab view - overlays a grid mask corresponding to the tabular

view to the right. Placing the pointer near the bottom end of the mask
may move around this grid mask, When the pointer changes character,
you can move the mask freely by keeping the left mouse button down.
Drop the mask at the new location by releasing the mouse button again.
The active point in the tabular view is highlighted in the mask with a dis-
tinct colour.

 Position of perpendicular slices - used only in connection with 3D files

 Selection - highlights the cells which have been selected by use of the
Selection tool.

 Color legend - places a colour legend next to the graphical representa-

tion, the colours should be set using the Palette (p. 86).

 Geographical net - lines of constant longitude and latitude are placed

over the graphical view

 Map Projection Net…- lines of constant Eastings and Northings are over-
laid.

 North Arrow - shows an arrow indicating the direction towards the geo-
graphical north pole

8.4.1 Map Projection

You can add or remove a map projection net in the display.

You can select which map projection net to overlay. Per default the displayed
map projection net is defined as in the data file.

8.4.2 North Arrow

You can add or remove a north indicator in the display.

You can choose between different types of indicators as well as specify a

given position for the north indicator to be placed in the display.

8.5 Grid Settings

Here you can define the way contours and isolines are displayed in the
Graphical View. The colours can be set using the Palette, and a colour legend
can be placed next to the grid, see Overlay (p. 86).

Powering Water Decisions 87

 View

8.6 Axis Annotation

Choose here how you would like the axis annotation on the graphical view to
be. The options are grid points, kilometres and metres.

8.7 Mouse Pointer Coordinates

When the mouse pointer is in the graphical view, the coordinates of the point
and the value at the point that you are pointing at are displayed in the Status
Bar.

Choose here how you would like the mouse pointer coordinates to be dis-
played. The options are (x,y)-coordinates, (lon,lat)-coordinates or UTM-coor-
dinates (the UTM-zone is defined by the information in the dfs2 file).

8.8 Fixed Aspect Ratio

This option can be switched on and off. Use this option to choose between
views with fixed aspect ratio or with aspect ratio adjusted to the size of the
graphical view.

8.9 Zoom and pan facilities

You can zoom in and out in the graphical view using the listed zoom options.

It is possible to zoom into a particular area by defining the grid coordinates for
the lower left and upper right corner.

Having zoomed into an area, it is possible to move the view area by the pan
functionality: press the shift button while moving the mouse.

8.10 Export Graphics

The entire plot area with all plot objects within can be exported to either Clip-
board, Metafile or Bitmap.

8.11 Toolbars
Two toolbars are particular to the Grid Editor:

 Grid Editor Tools toolbar

 Grid Editor Navigation toolbar

These toolbars provide easy and convenient access to a number of tools that
are also available from the Grid Editor menu bar.

88 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Status Bar

8.11.1 Grid Editor Tools

Pointer

Select Points (p. 92)

Select Lines (p. 92) (pull down from Select points)

Select Polygon (p. 92) (pull down from Select points)

Select Rectangle (p. 92) (pull down from Select

points)

Select All (p. 92)

Select View (p. 92)

Select Values (p. 92)

Calculator (p. 95)

Interpolation (p. 93)

8.11.2 Grid Editor Navigation

Move one step forward in time

Rewind one step in time

Move one layer up (3D only)

Move one layer down (3D only)

Select item

8.12 Status Bar

A status bar at the bottom of the application can be switched on and off.

When the pointer is in the graphical view, the status bar shows you the coor-
dinates of the point and the value at the point that you are pointing at.

Powering Water Decisions 89

 View

90 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Navigation

9 Tools

9.1 Navigation

The navigation dialog is used to position the editor at the desired layer of data
(in 3D) at the desired time step and the desired item. Simply choose the
wanted layer, time step and item and close. When you are working with a 3D
dataset and want to switch to another plane, you should click the appropriate
view at the bottom of the graphical view.

You may also conveniently use the Grid Editor Toolbars for navigating the
data.

9.2 Go to
Using this option your active cursor will move to the minimum or maximum
value in the Tabular View.

The Graphical View will not be synchronized accordingly.

9.3 Synchronize
Synchronize tab to map moves the Tabular View to the area displayed in
the centre of the Graphical View.

Synchronize map to tab moves the Graphical View to the area displayed in
the Tabular View.

Powering Water Decisions 91

 Tools

9.4 Selection

9.4.1 Select and deselect

These menu entries under Tools are used to activate the tools for making a
selection of grid cells that can then be processed in different ways. You can
also use the Select a Sub-Set of Data property page that are included in
many of the tools in the Grid Editor.

The Select tool is accumulative in the sense that the selections are combined
into one selection. To start from scratch you should un-select the cells. You
can also use the below tools in a deselect mode, such that you 'subtract' the
cells from the selection. There are a number of selection tools available:

Points
Use this tool to point to individual cells that you want to select. Click once at
each cell

Lines
Use this tool to select the cells along a line that you define. The cells nearest
this line will be selected. The line needs not be straight, but it can consist of a
number of straight segments. Click at points on the line and double click on
the last point

Polygon
Use this tool to select the cells inside a polygon. Click at each corner and fin-
ish by double clicking

Rectangle
Use this tool to select the cells inside a rectangle. Place the pointer at one
corner of the rectangle and pull it towards the opposite corner. When the
desired rectangle is shown, then click the mouse

View
Use this tool to select the cells shown in the current view

All
Use this tool to select all cells in the active dataset

Values
Use this tool to select the cells which do not have delete values

Highlighted in tabular view

This select the cells highlighted in the tabular view

92 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Interpolation

9.4.2 Select a Sub-Set of Data

Many of the tools in the Grid Editor operate on a sub-set of selected data from
the dataset. The active data are defined in the 'Sub-Set' property page.

The active data should be defined in terms of:

 Sub-area: choose either the points which have been selected using the
Selection option in the graphical view, or all grid points in the plane

 Items: Choose one or more of the items

 Time steps: choose a range of one or more time steps

 Layers: Choose a range of one or more layers

To change the position of the editor while the Subset page is invoked press
the "Navigation..." button to get access to the Navigation dialog.

9.5 Interpolation
This tool can be used to interpolate in the data and fill cells with missing val-
ues.

9.5.1 Active Dataset

The active data are defined in the “Select a Sub-Set of Data” page.

Powering Water Decisions 93

 Tools

9.5.2 Interpolation Settings

This parameter will determine how the interpolation will weigh the values
used in the interpolation according to the distance from the interpolation point
to these points. The weights can be based on the inverse of the distance, the
distance squared or the distance cubed, in order to vary the relative weight
given to the nearest points relative to points further away.

Land points can be ignored. This is very important when using artificial values
to indicate land, because if such values are included in the interpolation this
may lead to falsified results.

9.5.3 Search Type

Linear search
Depending on the type of data which are interpolated there may be an inter-
est to restrict the search for values to base the interpolation on to either verti-
cal or horizontal lines (i.e. along one or the other grid axis). One example
hereof could be bathymetric data in the surf zone where such data could be
obtained from a ship sailing along lines. Here the outcome of the interpolation
could vary significantly depending on the choice of search type.

Area integrated
Area integrated type for interpolation performs a convolution when calculating
the interpolated value. The algorithm starts it’s search in the current point and
searched in a rectangular area around the point. The size of the rectangle is
defined by the "Area side length". "Number of points" defines how many
neighbouring grid points that is used in the interpolation. If e.g. 20 is specified
in "Number of points" the search algorithm finds the 20 closest points inside
the specified rectangle and performs an inverse distance weighted interpola-
tion raised to the specified power chosen in interpolation settings.

9.6 Filter
This tool is used to perform digital filtering operations on the active data. The
active data are defined in the “Select a Sub-Set of Data” page.

A number of pre-defined filters are provided. Select the filter by clicking on

the stencil that you require:

Averaging Filter

Averaging Filter

94 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Set Value

Averaging Filter

Sharpening Filter

Sharpening Filter

The filtering process may be repeated a number of times to enhance the

effect.

Land values and delete values can be included in the calculations or ignored.
Typically delete values should not be included in the filtering process since
they represent 'empty' cells. Instead these cells could be filled by Interpola-
tion prior to the filtering. When filtering near land, the inclusion of land values
may lead to a falsification of the data for example when an artificial constant
land value has been specified in a bathymetry dataset.

9.7 Set Value

This tool is used for three operations on the active data:

 Set value: set all the active data to the specified value
 Add value: add the specified value to all the active data
 Multiply value: multiply all the active data by the specified value

The active data are defined in the “Select a Sub-Set of Data” page.

9.8 Calculator
This tool can be used to assign values to a dataset. It can be done in terms of
a simple value or as an expression. If an expression that includes the current
value (s) is used, no changes will be made to data points which current value
equals the delete value.

Active Dataset
The active data are defined in the “Select a Sub-Set of Data” page.

Expression
Then construct the expression for the calculation. As you input the expres-
sion, it will be shown in the field below. There are three types that you can
insert in the expression.

Operators: the four operators add, subtract, multiply and divide

Operands: j, k, l are the indices for the grid cell in the x-, y- and z-directions,
respectively, and s is the cell value itself

Powering Water Decisions 95

 Tools

Function: choose a mathematical function from the List of Functions below.

9.8.1 List of Functions

The Calculator allows you to compose your own expressions that can be
used to modify values in data sets. Below you will find a table with a list of the
mathematical functions you can choose between, which arguments they take
and which result they return.

Table 9.1 List of functions

Function Arguments Evaluation

Name Evaluation

abs (x) The absolute value of x

acos (x) The acos function returns the arccosine of x in the

range 0 to 180 degrees. If x is less than –1 or greater
than 1, acos returns a delete value

asin (x) The asin function returns the arcsine of x in the

range –90 to 90 degrees. If x is less than –1 or
greater than 1, asin returns a delete value

atan (x) atan returns the arctangent of x. If x is 0, atan

returns 0. atan returns a value in the range –90 to 90
degrees

atan2 (xy) atan2 returns the arctangent of y/x. If both parame-

ters of atan2 are 0, the function returns 0. atan2
returns a value in the range –180 to 180 degrees,
using the signs of both parameters to determine the
quadrant of the return value. atan2 is well defined for
every point other than the origin, even if x equals 0
and y does not equal 0

ceil (x) The ceil function returns a double value represent-

ing the smallest integer that is greater than or equal
to x

cos (x) The cos function returns the cosine of x (x in

degrees)

cosh (x) The cosh function returns the hyperbolic cosine of x

cube (x) Returns the cube of x, i.e. x3

exp (x) The exp function returns the exponential value of the
floating-point parameter, x

96 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Calculator

Table 9.1 List of functions

floor (x) The floor function returns a floating-point value rep-

resenting the largest integer that is less than or
equal to x

int (x) Returns the integer value of the argument x

ln (x) The ln function returns the natural logarithm of x if

successful. If x is negative, the function returns a
delete value. If x is 0, it returns a delete value

log10 (x) The log10 function returns the base-10 logarithm of

x if successful. If x is negative, the function returns a
delete value. If x is 0, it returns a delete value

max (xy) max returns the larger of its arguments

min (xy) min returns the smaller of its arguments

mod (xy) mod returns the floating-point remainder of x / y. If

the value of y is 0.0, mod returns a delete value

pow (xy) pow returns the value of x

racos (x) The racos function returns the arccosine of x in the

range 0 to  radians. If x is less than –1 or greater
than 1, racos returns a delete value

rasin (x) The rasin function returns the arcsine of x in the

range – /2 to  /2 radians. If x is less than –1 or
greater than 1, rasin returns a delete value

ratan (x) ratan returns the arctangent of x. If x is 0, atan

returns 0. atan returns a value in the range – /2 to 
/2 radians

ratan2 (xy) ratan2 returns the arctangent of y/x. If both parame-

ters of ratan2 are 0, the function returns 0. ratan2
returns a value in the range – to  radians, using
the signs of both parameters to determine the quad-
rant of the return value. ratan2 is well defined for
every point other than the origin, even if x equals 0
and y does not equal 0

rcos (x) rcos returns the cosine of x (x in radians)

rsin (x) rsin returns the sine of x (x in radians)

rtan (x) rtan returns the tangent of x (x in radians)

sin (x) sin returns the sine of x (x in degrees)

sinh (x) sinh returns the hyperbolic sine of x

sqr (x) Returns the square of x, i.e. x2

Powering Water Decisions 97

 Tools

Table 9.1 List of functions

sqrt (x) The sqrt function returns the square root of x. If x is

negative, sqrt returns a delete value

tan (x) tan returns the tangent of x (x in degrees)

tanh (x) tanh returns the hyperbolic tangent of x

9.9 Calculate Statistics

This tool calculates the statistics of the Active Dataset and display the values
in a window.

Active Dataset
The active data are defined in the “Select a Sub-Set of Data” page.

Statistics
The calculated values includes the minimum, maximum and mean value and
the standard deviation.

Furthermore a block diagram shows the distribution of the values in the inter-
vals defined by the Palette.

9.10 Copy File into Data

This tool can be used to copy data from a file into the dataset being edited.

98 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Copy File into Data

9.10.1 File to Copy

Select the data file from which data should be copied.

If you edit a 2D data file you may copy data from a 2D data file.
If you edit a 3D data file you may copy data from either 2D or 3D data files.

9.10.2 Item Mapping

Select the items from which data should be copied and the corresponding
items to which data should be copied.

You may copy several items in one process.

9.10.3 2D to 3D Layer Mapping

When copying a 2D file into a 3D file you can choose to populate either one
particular layer in the 3D file or all layers.

Powering Water Decisions 99

 Tools

9.10.4 Sub-area Position

Give the coordinates in the grid being edited where the origin of the data to be
copied should be positioned. As an example, we have a grid with the dimen-
sions (0:20,0:20) and we wish to copy data into the rectangle given by the
four points (10,14), (13,14), (13,17) and (10,17). We select a file which has
data in a grid (0:3,0:3) and specify j-origin=10 and k-origin=17. This will place
the copied data in the desired rectangle.

9.10.5 Time Position

The copied data can be placed in the dataset being edited from a given time
step and forwards. You can specify either the time step or the time. If you
specify the time, and that time is not coincident with a time step in the edited
dataset, then the nearest time step which is shown in the time step origin edit
field will be used.

9.10.6 Operation

When the data is copied to the dataset, this may be done in a number of
ways:

 Copy (all values are copied such that they replace the existing data in the
dataset)
 Copy if target differs from delete value
 Copy if source differs from delete value
 Copy if source AND target differs from delete value
 +: the values are added to the existing data in the dataset
 -: the values are subtracted from the existing data in the dataset
 *: the existing values are multiplied by the values in the file
 /: the existing values are divided by the values in the file

9.11 Crop
This tool is used to crop (or reduce) the dataset in one or more ways.

100 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Crop

Spatial cropping
Use this option to crop the data to a smaller spatial coverage. Choose a rec-
tangular area either as the current view or as the area described by the coor-
dinates given by you. The data outside the selected area will be discarded.

Item cropping
Use this option to choose the items to keep, the rest of the items are dis-
carded.

Time cropping
Use this option to discard time steps in the dataset. The data outside the cho-
sen interval will be discarded. The time interval can be selected in terms of
the time or the time step number.

Powering Water Decisions 101

 Tools

102 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Image Manager

10 Data Overlay

10.1 Image Manager

In the Image Manager you specify the overlay file name and type.

If you want to save a link between the overlay file file image and the specific
grid file, you can use the Grid State Format (p. 72).

Figure 10.1 Example of background layer

10.2 Overlay Manager

In the Overlay Manager you specify which layer(s) to display and the
display order. Remember to adjust the transparency level in Grid
Settings (p. 87).

Powering Water Decisions 103

 Data Overlay

104 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 BATHYMETRY EDITOR

Powering Water Decisions 105

106 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
11 Introduction
The first appearance of the Bathymetry Editor differs if you create a new set
of bathymetry editing specifications compared to opening an existing specifi-
cation (*.BATSF) file.

The Bathymetry Editor provides a work environment for creating, editing and
presenting detailed digital bathymetries.

The Bathymetry Editor includes utilities for importing raw data from various
external sources (i.e. xyz soundings, xyz contours, MIKE 21 formatted data),
or to manually create data by using the built-in drawing tools. To aid the pro-
cess of editing data and to use for presentations, graphical background
images such as maps can be imported and overlaid with the bathymetry data.

Creating a new Bathymetry Editor setup first of all requires that the geograph-
ical workspace area be defined. If you are opening an existing bathymetry
editor specification file, the working area with all saved settings is presented
on the screen.

The Bathymetry Editor is operated from the main menu, the tool bar icon or
from the menu selection obtained by right-clicking on the graphical display of
the working area.

An example with a step-by-step description is included with the installation.

Please find this example in your installation folder under Exam-
ples\MIKEZero\BatEdit.

Various interpolation options are available to you to provide the best possible
method for your type of data.

When the bathymetry has been prepared, you can use the export utilities to
output bathymetry data in various formats.

Powering Water Decisions 107

 Introduction

108 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 1: Create a new Bathymetry document

12 Getting Started
The following example provides you with an introduction to the Bathymetry
Editor.

12.1 Step 1: Create a new Bathymetry document

From the File menu in the main window select New->File or press the New
File button

and select Bathymetries in the New File dialog

Figure 12.1 New file dialog

The Define Working Area dialog will appear, see Figure 13.1. Define your
Work Area sufficiently large such that it covers a geographical area which
contains all relevant data.

Hint: Select "Views -> Double Buffer Redraw" to speed up re-drawing of

graphics between the different steps.

12.2 Step 2: Import background data

Data such as digitised coastline data or images can be imported to the back-
ground (WorkArea -> Background Management -> Import) to provide a visual
reference of the defined Work Area. The data is then imported as background

Powering Water Decisions 109

 Getting Started

objects and will be displayed at the correct geographical positions within the
previously defined Work Area.

Hint: Select "WorkArea -> Settings" and under "Background Objects" find the
"Land/Water Lines" and adjust the "Thickness" to (say) 1 to obtain a nice
thickness of lines drawn between land/water points. Similar adjustment might
be useful for the "Point Size" of "Land/Water Points".

Hint: Save you specifications: Go to File -> Save.

12.3 Step 3: Import digitised survey depth data

Digitised survey depth data to be used in the generation of the bathymetry is
first imported to the background (WorkArea -> Background Management ->
Import). The depth data is now imported as background objects and should
be displayed at the correct geographical positions within the previously
defined Work Area.

Hint: Select "WorkArea -> Settings" and under "Background Objects" find the
"Points" and adjust "Point Size" to (say) 0.5 to obtain a nice size of these
background objects.

12.4 Step 4: Import data from background

To import the survey depth data from the background do following:

1. Mark your points by selecting "Import from Background" and drag pointer
to select area of selected points.

2. The selected points are now changing colour.

3. Finally press "Import from Background" once more

.

4. The selected points are now changing colour again and are ready to be
included in the generation of the bathymetry.

HINT: Depending on your work area settings, the colour/size/shape of the

imported points/lines might be different from the ones shown as background
object. You may adjust these settings from the dialog on the "Graphics" tab
under "WorkArea -> Settings".

110 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Case A - Create Grid Bathymetry

12.5 Case A - Create Grid Bathymetry

12.5.1 Step 5A: Define grid bathymetry

To define a grid bathymetry select WorkArea -> Grid Bathymetry Manage-

ment -> New" and enter the parameters as described in section 13.5.1 New
Bathymetry (p. 124).

Figure 12.2 Example of Bathymetry Area displayed on top of background data

12.5.2 Step 6A: Interpolate xyz data to grid points

To generate a bathymetry from the imported xyz data select "WorkArea ->
Bathymetry Management -> Interpolate".

This generates a temporary bathymetry file in memory.

12.5.3 Step 7A: Save bathymetry file

To save the temporary bathymetry file on the harddisk (using a default name)
save your work by “File -> Save”.

To save the bathymetry file by a specific name use "WorkArea -> Grid
Bathymetry Management -> Export".

Your gridded bathymetry data file is now found in the same folder as the
.batsf file.

Powering Water Decisions 111

 Getting Started

Figure 12.3 Example of generated bathymetry.

12.6 Case B - Create Line Bathymetry

12.6.1 Step 5B: Define line bathymetry

To define a line bathymetry select WorkArea -> Line Bathymetry Manage-

ment -> New" and enter the parameters as described in 13.6.1 New bathym-
etry (p. 130).

112 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Case B - Create Line Bathymetry

Figure 12.4 Example of Line outline displayed on top of point data

12.6.2 Step 6B: Interpolate xyz data to grid points

To generate a bathymetry from the imported xyz data select "WorkArea ->
Line Bathymetry Management -> Interpolate".

This generates a temporary bathymetry file.

12.6.3 Step 7B: Save bathymetry file

To save the temporary bathymetry file on the harddisk (using a default name)
save your work by “File -> Save”.

To save the bathymetry file by a specific name use "WorkArea -> Line
Bathymetry Management -> Export".

Your line bathymetry data file is now found in the same folder as the .batsf
file.

Figure 12.5 Example of generated bathymetry

Powering Water Decisions 113

 Getting Started

114 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Menu

13 Dialog Overview

The bathymetry editor provides you a work environment for creating, editing
and presenting detailed digital bathymetries.

13.1 File Menu

This is where you can open, close and save files, and access printer related
utilities.

13.1.1 File/New Menu

This is where you can define a new Workspace Area from which you can cre-
ate a bathymetry.

A working area is defined by a Map projection, a Geographical origin and a

Spatial Extent.

Powering Water Decisions 115

 Dialog Overview

Figure 13.1 Define working area

Map projection
The map projection defines the local coordinate system/rectangular area in
which the data is specified. It is best to select a map projection that result in a
minimum of distortion of the spatial data.

MIKE Zero provides a comprehensive list of pre-defined map projections that

can be selected from the Map Projection type drop-down box. Often the map
projection will be of type Transverse Mercator, but other types are available
as well. The map projection type “LONG/LAT” is mainly relevant for model
applications using spherical coordinates, i.e. for modules in the MIKE 21/3
FM series.

A map projection is basically a formula for converting between Cartesian

(x,y)-coordinates - often in map projections referred to as easting and north-
ing - and longitudes and latitudes. Thus whenever the map projection is

116 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Menu

changed you will get the opportunity to select how to synchronize the coordi-
nates of the origin of the local coordinate system.

Hint: It is possible to create new map projections to be included in the drop-

down box. This is done by utilizing the ‘Edit Map Projection’ utility. A User
Guide on how to work with geographical data and map projections in MIKE
Zero is available from the MIKE Zero General Documentation Index.

Geographical origin
The coordinates of the origin may be defined in two ways:

 Geographical coordinates specified by longitude and latitude

(it is possible to define the type of input)

 Map projection coordinates specified by Easting and Northing

The two specification modes are linked such that e.g. when modifying the ori-
gin using the Map projection values, the Geographical coordinates will auto-
matically be updated accordingly.

Note that you can change the origin of the workspace again at a later time if
necessary.

Spatial Extent
The extent of the working area is defined by the width and height of a rectan-
gular coordinate system, oriented towards north. The properties and units of
the coordinate system correspond to the given Map projection and the origin
of the working area is defined by the given longitude and latitude of the Geo-
graphical origin.

Note that you can change the dimensions of the workspace again at a later
time if necessary.

13.1.2 File/Open Menu

This is where you open an existing file or bathymetry workspace.

Powering Water Decisions 117

 Dialog Overview

Figure 13.2 Open file menu

13.2 Edit Menu

Clipboard editing operations.

Undo
This will undo your last operation

Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies and pastes your selected data through the Windows clipboard

Delete
Deletes your selected data. The DELETE keyboard command will also per-
form the same function.

13.3 View Menu

This is where you add toolbar views, status bar and enable double buffer
redraws.

Double Buffer Redraw

Double buffer redraw uses a technique where you draw into a bitmap and
then copy the bitmap to the display. It gives you a much faster refresh rate of
the display, but you sacrifice available system memory.

118 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Work Area Menu

13.4 Work Area Menu

The Work Area menu provides you access to the main tools for bathymetry
definition, creation, interpolation, editing, overlaying images, turning layers on
and off, and presentation.

13.4.1 Set Current Contour Level

This menu pop-up is where you enter the Current Contour Level (depth).
After you set the Current Contour Level value, all manual input data will
acquire that depth value until you change the value of the Current Contour
Level.

13.4.2 Grid Bathymetry Management

This is where grid bathymetries are defined, re-defined, interpolated and

exported to other formats. The system will allow you to manage a number of
grids originating from a single raw data source.

For more information see 13.5 Grid Bathymetry (p. 124).

Figure 13.3 Grid bathymetry management, main dialog

New
New Bathymetry is where you can define a grid bathymetry within the work-
space.

Edit
Edit Bathymetry is where you can edit the definition of a previously defined
grid bathymetry.

Delete
This is where you can delete a previously defined grid bathymetry.

Powering Water Decisions 119

 Dialog Overview

Export
Export Bathymetry is where you can export the grid bathymetry to various for-
mats such as binary data files or ASCII formats or as a depth encoded
BITMAP graphic file.

Interpolate
Interpolate Bathymetry is where you can define the interpolation method and
interpolate the defined grid to a digital grid.

13.4.3 Line Bathymetry Management

This is where line bathymetries are defined, re-defined, interpolated and

exported to dfs1 files. The system will allow you to manage a number of lines
originating from a single raw data source.

For more information see 13.6 Line Bathymetry (p. 130).

Figure 13.4 Line bathymetry management, main dialog

New
New Bathymetry is where you can define a line bathymetry within the work-
space.

Edit
Edit Bathymetry is where you can edit the definition of a previously defined
line bathymetry.

Delete
This is where you can delete a previously defined line bathymetry.

Export
Export Bathymetry is where you can export the generated line bathymetry to
a dfs1 file.

Interpolate
Interpolate Bathymetry is where you can define search radius for the points
used in the interpolation.

120 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Work Area Menu

Presently it is only possible to project the points directly to the line.

Note that a work area using LONG/LAT will produce inaccurate results for this
type of bathymetry.

13.4.4 Background Management

The Background Management system provides you the utility of bringing

external data sources into the Bathymetry Editor program. Your background
data can either be imported x,y,z data to be added to the raw database, or it
can be image files to provide background images much like a GIS system.
You can control the visualization attributes of the data in Settings.

Figure 13.5 Background management

Powering Water Decisions 121

 Dialog Overview

Import

Figure 13.6 Import files into background

Normally you first import data in the background into your work area. Types of
data which you can import into the background include digitizer files, MIKE 21
XYZ-files, graphical BITMAP and GIF file formats. Before you can import
graphical files into the Bathymetry Editor, you need to rectify the image to a
compatible coordinate system defined for your work area. (see MIKE Zero
Image Rectifier for details on preparing graphic files for the Bathymetry Edi-
tor).

When you import MIKE 21 XYZ files you can specify the source coordinate
system. When the XYZ-file is selected but before the “Open”-button is
pressed or a double click is executed, the source coordinate system can be
specified by selecting from the “Convert from”-combo box. Coordinates can
be imported without conversion, as longitude/latitude or by various map pro-
jections. Note that datum shift will not be considered during this automatic
conversion.

A number of background sources can be imported into your work area. If you
no longer need a background source, simply highlight the background source
you want to delete and then click the DELETE option.

122 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Work Area Menu

13.4.5 Export raw data to XYZ format

You can export selected raw data to xyz format using this facility. Two ASCII
files will be generated. A land file and a water file.

13.4.6 Resize workspace area

This is where you can re-define your Workspace Area with a new Spatial
Extent and a new Geographical Origin.

13.4.7 Settings

The settings panel allows you to control the attributes for the 4 main layers;
Bathymetry Objects, Line Bathymetry Objects, Raw Data Objects and Back-
ground Objects. By turning on or off certain layers you can view and edit
these layers either individually or in combination with other layers. You can
display each object as either points, lines or labels where you can also define
the point size, line size and colour given to each layer independently.

Figure 13.7 Settings panel

Bathymetry Objects
Bathymetry Objects are those that have been interpolated into a fixed grid.
You can control Point, Line and Label attributes.

Line Bathymetry Objects

Line Bathymetry Objects are those that have been interpolated onto a fixed
line. You can control Point, Line and Label attributes.

Powering Water Decisions 123

 Dialog Overview

Raw Data Objects

Raw Data Object or Foreground objects are those that are available to be
interpolated. You can control raw data objects defined as Points, Contour
Points, Contour Lines, Land/Water Points, Land/Water Lines and Labels.

Background Objects
Background objects are those you have imported, but are not yet available to
be interpolated. You can control background objects defined as Points, Con-
tour Points, Contour Lines, Land/Water Points, Land/Water Lines and Labels.
To bring background images and data into the Foreground and produce Raw
Data Objects, you should use the Toolbar Functions.

13.4.8 Set Font

You can set the font attributes here from this menu.

13.4.9 Show Background Images

If you have imported a graphical image into the Background objects, then you
can turn the display of the background on or off here.

13.5 Grid Bathymetry

A grid bathymetry defines a dfs2 file containing bathymetry information.

13.5.1 New Bathymetry

You define a digital grid by specifying the Geographical Origin and Orienta-
tion of the grid (in UTM or Geographic coordinates), and some Overall
bathymetry properties that includes the grid resolution and specification of
land.

124 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Grid Bathymetry

Figure 13.8 Define digital grid for bathymetry

Geographical Origin
You must specify the position of the origin for your grid bathymetry in map
projection or Long/LAT coordinates.

Powering Water Decisions 125

 Dialog Overview

The geographical position of the origin of the grid is defined as the centre
point in the first grid cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Figure 13.9 Definition of Origo

Note: If the map projection is defined as NON-UTM, the origo is defined as

the lower left corner of cell (j,k) = (0,0).

Orientation
The orientation of your grid is defined as the angle between true north and
the y-axis of the grid measured clockwise (“North to Y orientation”). A mne-
monic way of remembering this definition is by thinking of NYC, which nor-
mally means New York City, but which for our purpose means "from North to
the Y-axis Clockwise", see Figure 13.10.

Figure 13.10 Definition of North to Y orientation

The grid rotation defines the clockwise rotation of the grid from map projec-
tion north to model north (y-axis of the grid).

Please Note: In general the grid rotation is not equal to the North to Y orien-
tation as the map projection north deviate increasingly from true north the
longer away from the centre of the map projection domain the model area is
placed, see Figure 13.11.

126 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Grid Bathymetry

Figure 13.11 Left: Chart north (Nc) and true north (NT) for single UTM zone.
Right: Difference between Grid rotation and North to Y orientation.

Overall bathymetry properties

Grid Spacing
You must specify the distance between grid points in the x and y directions, in
metres.

Grid Dimensions
You must specify the number of grid points in the x and y directions.

Land Value
You must specify the limiting grid cell value defining land. All values above
this will be considered to be land.

Display Border
You can choose to display the boundary of your defined grid in the Work Area
after interpolation.

Display Grid Points

You can choose to display the grid points of your defined grid in the Work
Area after interpolation.

13.5.2 Edit Bathymetry

You can re-define a previously defined digital grid here by changing the origin
(in UTM or LONG/LAT coordinates), the orientation of the grid, the x and y
grid spacing, the number of grid points in x and y, and the land value.

Powering Water Decisions 127

 Dialog Overview

13.5.3 Export Bathymetry

You can use this facility to export your interpolated digital grid to another for-
mat such as binary data files or ASCII formats, or to a graphical Depth
BITMAP file.

Figure 13.12 Export interpolated digital grid bathymetry to another format

13.5.4 Interpolate Bathymetry

This is where you specify how your raw data is interpolated to the fixed grid
as has been specified in the bathymetry definition.

128 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Grid Bathymetry

Figure 13.13 Interpolate raw data to fixed grid

Land Generation (Phase I)

There are 2 methods for interpolating the land:

1. Polygon Fill
2. Extensive

If your land boundaries have been entered as polygons, then all areas inside
the polygon are assigned the value of +10m which is the usual default land
value. If you are using land polygons you would choose the polygon fill
method. This is a much faster interpolation scheme than the Extensive
method that interpolates all grid points based on nearest raw values. You
would choose the extensive method if you do not have land polygons, or if
you want to interpolate true topographic elevations.

Box Grouping (Phase II)

This option specifies how the raw data points are sorted. Currently the raw
data points can only be sorted by grouping them by their cell index.

Gap Filling (Phase III)

This is where you choose which interpolation technique will be used for gap
filling at grid points where no land exists. You specify a search radius that
defines how many grid points the search will extend. There are currently 4
search methods available to you.

1. Bilinear interpolation
Four points from the raw data, in the vicinity of the actual point, are found
in such a way that there is a point in each quadrant. These points now
form a quadrangle (or quadrilateral) that encapsulates the grid point.

Powering Water Decisions 129

 Dialog Overview

This quadrangle is now transformed into a normalized square (rectified),

and bilinear interpolation is performed.
2. Triangular interpolation
Three points from the raw data, in the vicinity of the actual point, are
found in such a way, that they form a triangle that encapsulates the grid
point. Triangular interpolation is now performed.
3. Inverse distance weighted interpolation
Four points from the raw data nearest to the actual point measured in
each main direction are selected. The inverse distance from the actual
point determines the weight of each point in the interpolation.
NOTE: The result may be affected by the orientation of the grid
4. Inverse squared distance weighted interpolation
Four points from the raw data nearest to the actual point measured in
each main direction are selected. The inverse squared distance from the
actual point determines the weight of each point in the interpolation.
NOTE: The result may be affected by the orientation of the grid

13.6 Line Bathymetry

A line bathymetry defines a dfs1 file containing bathymetry values or relative
coastline position.

13.6.1 New bathymetry

You define a digital line by specifying the Geographical origin and Orientation
of the line (in map projection or geographic coordinates).

You also define some overall Overall bathymetry properties that includes the
type of line and line resolution.

Geographical origin
You must specify the position of the origin for your line bathymetry in map
projection or Long/LAT coordinates.

The geographical position of the origin is defined by grid point 0.

Figure 13.14 Definition of Origo for line

130 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Line Bathymetry

Orientation
The orientation of your line is defined as the angle between true north and the
direction of the line measured clockwise.

Figure 13.15 Definition of North to Y orientation

Please Note: In general the line rotation is not equal to the North to Y orienta-
tion as the map projection north deviate increasingly from true north the
longer away from the centre of the map projection domain the model area is
placed, see Figure 13.16.

Figure 13.16 Left: Chart north (Nc) and true north (NT) for single UTM zone.
Right: Difference between Line rotation and North to Y orientation.

Overall bathymetry properties

Type of 1D bathymetry
You must specify the type of bathymetry. You can choose between

 Cross-shore profile
(will contain bathymetry values along the line)

Powering Water Decisions 131

 Dialog Overview

 Coastline position
(will contain distance from raw points to the line)

Grid Spacing
You must specify the distance between grid points along the line.

Grid Dimensions
You must specify the number of grid points on the line.

Display Line
You can choose to display the extension of your defined line in the Work
Area.

Display Grid Points

You can choose to display the grid points of your defined line in the Work
Area.

13.6.2 Edit bathymetry

You can re-define a previously defined digital line here by changing the origin
(in UTM or LONG/LAT coordinates), the orientation of the line, the grid spac-
ing and the number of grid points.

13.6.3 Export bathymetry

You use this facility to export your interpolated digital line to a dfs1 file.

13.6.4 Interpolate bathymetry

This is where you specify how your raw data is interpolated onto the fixed line
that as has been specified in the bathymetry definition.

Search radius
You specify a search radius that defined how near the points have to be to the
defined line in order to be included in the interpolation.

Figure 13.17 Interpolate raw data to fixed line

132 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Window Menu

Note: presently it is only possible to apply Linear interpolation.

Linear interpolation
The data on the line is derived by first projecting the raw data points perpen-
dicular onto the line. The values on the line is then interpolated linearly and
the values extracted in the grid point positions along the line.

13.7 Window Menu

This provides you the standard Windows views, and allows you to switch
between different open windows.

13.8 Toolbar Functions

The following describes the main editing functions that are available to you
from the toolbar.

Zoom Functions

You can Zoom-in, Zoom-out and go to Previous-zoom and Next-zoom. You

can recall all available previous and next zooms. If the buttons are grayed-out
there are no previous or next zooms available. These functions are also avail-
able to you by right-clicking the pointer device.

Grid Function

Switch to turn grid on and off.

Pick Mode

Pick Mode. When you enable pick mode, raw data points (foreground points)
can be selected by dragging the mouse over the points of interest while
depressing the left-mouse button.

Powering Water Decisions 133

 Dialog Overview

Move Mode

Move Mode. If you depress the left-mouse button while over a point you wish
to move, the point can be dragged to a new location.

Import From Background

Import From Background mode. With this mode, you can select the back-
ground points you want to be brought to the foreground to become part of the
digital grid bathymetry. Click the Import From Background toolbar button.
Highlight the background points you wish to import (single points or area
selection). After the background points have been highlighted you then click
on the Import From Background toolbar button again. The background data
will be transferred to the foreground and become raw data points.

Add Data Points Mode

Add Data Points Mode. In this mode, you click the mouse on a position in the
work area, resulting in a raw data point with a depth equal to the current con-
tour level.

Add Contours Mode

Add Contours Mode. In this mode, you hold down the left-mouse button and
drag the mouse. It will place consecutive points of a contour line in the work
area as raw data points with a constant depth equal to the current contour
level.

Add Land/Water Polygons Mode

Add Land/Water Polygons Mode. In this mode, you hold down the left-mouse
button and drag the mouse. This will place consecutive points of a polygon
used to define land/water boundaries. These points will go into the raw data
layer. For land the current contour level should be set to a value of +10.

134 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Toolbar Functions

Add Points to Contours or Land/Water or Polygons Mode

Add Points to Contours or Land/Water Polygons Mode. In this mode, you hold
down the left-mouse button near the end point of a contour or polygon. This
will allow you to add more points to the existing contour entity.

Select Polygons or Contours Mode

Enables selection of entire polygons or contours. By left clicking when touch-

ing just a small part of the polygon/contour the entire polygon/contour is
selected.

NOTE
The minimum digitization distance between consecutive points when digitiz-
ing in the Bathymetry Editor is 5 units of whatever local coordinate system the
working area has been defined in. When working in longitude/latitude type
coordinate systems, this is a significant distance and the user will experience
it impossible to digitize when working in smaller areas. In such cases, the
user should digitize in an alternate coordinate system using length units. The
digitized values may then be exported to a xyz file and subsequently imported
into a Bathymetry Editor setup using a longitude/latitude type coordinate sys-
tem.

Powering Water Decisions 135

 Dialog Overview

136 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 MESH GENERATOR

Powering Water Decisions 137

138 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
14 Introduction
The Mesh Generator provides a work environment for creating detailed digital
mesh for use in the MIKE Zero flexible mesh (FM) models.

Providing these new generation models with a suitable mesh is essential for
obtaining reliable results from the model simulations. MIKE Zero offers the
MIKE 21 Flow Model FM, MIKE 3 Flow Model FM and MIKE 21 Spectral
Wave Model FM, which all are based on a flexible mesh.

Figure 14.1 Land/Water boundary for a domain covering the Planet Earth

Setting up a mesh includes appropriate selection of the area to be modelled,

adequate resolution of the bathymetry, flow, wind and wave fields under con-
sideration and definition of codes for open and land boundaries. Furthermore,
the resolution in the geographical space must also be selected with respect to
stability considerations.

You generate a mesh file with the MIKE Zero Mesh Generator. The mesh file
is an ASCII file (.mesh extension) that includes information of the geographi-
cal position and water depth at each node point in the mesh. The file also
includes information about the node connectivity of the triangular and quad-
rangular elements. All the specifications for generating the mesh file are
saved in a Mesh Definition File (.mdf extension), which can be modified and
re-used.

The Mesh Generator includes utilities for importing raw data from various
external sources (e.g. XYZ soundings, XYZ contours, MIKE 21 bathymetries,
MIKE C-MAP exported data), or to manually create data by using the built-in
drawing tools. You can import background images such as maps in the Mesh

Powering Water Decisions 139

 Introduction

Generator and use them when editing data or for e.g. enhancing presentation
graphics.

14.1 Concepts
Your work with the Mesh Generator revolves around inserting and defining
nodes, vertices, arcs and polygons. It is therefore important that you under-
stand the meaning of these concepts, shown in Figure 14.2.

Figure 14.2 Concepts in Mesh Generator

 A node defines the start and end point of an arc. A closed arc will only
have one node while an open arc will have two nodes.

 A vertex is an internal point along an arc.

 An arc is a number of line segments composed of zero or more vertices

and one or two nodes.

140 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definitions

 A polygon is a closed loop composed of one closed arc, or two or more

open arcs. A polygon is not explicitly defined by the user - it is automati-
cally generated when closing an arc or a set of arcs. A polygon can (but
not necessarily) be assigned to be a 'zone', which can be given a name.
By defining a zone, the polygon can be included or excluded (e.g. repre-
senting an island) from the domain or may be identified as a region
where a quadrangular mesh is required. Basically, your work with the
Mesh Generator should end up with the definition of one large polygon
that defines the domain and a number of smaller polygons defining land
areas and quadrangular mesh areas within the domain area.

NOTE: The terms domain area and workspace area refer to the areas that
are to be modelled with one of the FM models and the area in which you are
working within the Mesh Generator, respectively. The domain area is a subset
of the workspace area.

Your work with the Mesh Generator comes in three phases:

1. Definition of the model boundaries - closed boundaries (land-water) and

open boundaries (see Boundary Definitions). You define the boundaries
by importing land-water boundary files or by drawing arcs in the work-
space area.
2. When you are satisfied with the model boundary, you generate a depth-
independent mesh. You can control the mesh generation by defining a
maximum triangle area, maximum skewness of the triangles and a maxi-
mum number of generated mesh points. Further you may identify areas
defined by ‘zones’ within which the mesh may be constructed as quad-
rangular or defined by another maximum triangle area.
3. In the last phase you can refine the mesh by scaling the element areas
according to the water depth at the element centre point (this requires
the import of water depth information) or modify the mesh using the
Mesh Editing facilities. You can define different polygons within the work-
space area and modify the mesh within the areas independently of each
other.

14.2 Boundary Definitions

You distinguish between closed and open boundaries through the point attrib-
ute parameter. For each node in the grid you shall specify an attribute value.
You do this by selecting the node (or nodes), right-clicking and selecting prop-
erties. From the Point Properties dialog box you can enter the node attribute
value, see Figure 14.3.

Powering Water Decisions 141

 Introduction

Figure 14.3 Defining node attribute value

The numeric value of the attribute field (the field labeled ‘a’ on the dialog) is
important. The value is used to distinguish between the different open bound-
aries in the mesh. Later when you apply the generated mesh in a model
setup, you will be asked to associate each open boundary defined in the
mesh with a boundary condition. You shall use a value of ‘1’ for all closed (i.e.
land-water) boundaries in the mesh, whereas all open boundaries must be
defined with a number > 1.

Note: Per default the Mesh Generator assumes that all boundaries are land
boundaries when generating the mesh. I.e. you only have to specify attribute
values for open boundaries.

Hint: you can select an arc and specify an arc attribute value, which willthen
be used as attribute for all points (vertices and nodes) along the arc.

14.3 Context sensitive menu

You gain access to the context sensitive menu by right-clicking the mouse in
the graphics area, see Figure 14.4.

In this menu you may define the selection property (node, rectangle or poly-
gon) or change the view.

Figure 14.4 Context sensitive menu

142 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Introduction

15 Getting Started

15.1 Introduction
This chapter offers a brief introduction to mesh generation with the Mesh
Generator. The following example guides you through the setup of a mesh for
Funningsfjord - a fjord on the Faeroe Islands.

The example consists of the following steps:

Step 1 - Create a New Mesh Generator Workspace

Step 2 - Import Model Boundaries
Step 3 - Editing the Land Boundary
Step 4 - Specification of Domain
Step 5 - Specification of Boundaries
Step 6 - Mesh Generation
Step 7 - Smooth the Land Boundary
Step 8 - Smoothing the Mesh
Step 9 - Interpolation of a Bathymetry to the Mesh
Step 10 - Using Polygons to Control the Node Density
Step 11 - Using Polygons to Define Mesh Resolution Type
Step 12 - Analyse the mesh

NOTE: A comprehensive Step-by-step training guide for the Mesh Generator

is available. The training guide (PDF-format) can be accessed from the MIKE
Zero General Documentation Index.

15.2 Data Location

The data files used in the example are located in the default MIKE Zero
installation folder at

.\Examples\MIKE_Zero\MeshEdit

15.3 Step 1 - Create a New Mesh Generator Workspace

From the MIKE Zero File menu select New->File->Mesh Generator. You must
specify the projection of your coming mesh, before the Mesh Generator can
create a workspace for you to work with.

The Mesh Generator starts by prompting you for a map projection as shown
in Figure 15.1.

Powering Water Decisions 143

 Getting Started

Figure 15.1 Workspace projection

Please specify the projection as WGS_1984_UTM_Zone_30N.

The Mesh Generator then creates a workspace and you are ready to initiate
with the mesh creation process.

15.4 Step 2 - Import Model Boundaries

Model boundaries consist of two types:

 The boundary(ies) between land and water.

These boundaries are named land boundaries.

 The boundary(ies) where you expose boundary conditions (water level,

flux variations or wave spectra) when preparing a model simulation.
These boundaries are named open boundaries.

The easiest way to define model boundaries is by using the MIKE C-MAP
tool. MIKE C-MAP is a global database with water depth and land-water
boundaries. You can zoom to a specific area in MIKE C-MAP and export
land-water boundaries and water depth values for use with the Mesh Genera-
tor.

Two data files are supplied with the example:

 land.xyz defining land boundaries

 water.xyz giving water depth at a number of points within the area

The area from where data has been extracted is shown in Figure 15.2.

144 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 2 - Import Model Boundaries

Figure 15.2 Funning Fjord

From the Data menu please select the Import Boundary… menu item and
browse to the land.xyz file. After having selected the land.xyz file, you will be
presented with a Boundary Attribute dialog as shown in Figure 15.3.

Figure 15.3 Boundary Properties

In this menu you shall specify the layout of the land.xyz file, the projection of
the data and how to interpret the data. The Reference Guide provides details
on import formats.

Please specify the values as shown in Figure 15.3.

Powering Water Decisions 145

 Getting Started

NOTE: The projection here is specified as LONG/LAT meaning that the data
in the land.xyz file are in longitude and latitude. The Mesh Generator will con-
vert the longitudes and latitudes to easting and northing coordinates in the
UTM-30 projection.

The Mesh Generator reads the data file and updates the workspace as
shown in Figure 15.4.

Figure 15.4 Imported Boundary Data

It is only the area in fjord itself that shall be modelled, i.e. the Mesh Generator
shall only generate a mesh within the fjord. From Figure 15.4 it can be seen
that the area to be modelled consists of:

 One open model boundary at the north-east corner of the model area
 Land boundaries along the west and east part of the fjord

The next step involves cleaning the workspace for unnecessary land-water
boundary points.

15.5 Step 3 - Editing the Land Boundary

During this step you shall remove all points that are located outside the model
area as depicted in Figure 15.4.

146 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 3 - Editing the Land Boundary

Please start by deleting the points and arc segments from the left part of the
workspace. You select the Delete points button (the eraser) in the toolbar and
click on the points and arcs in the left part of the window. This is illustrated
below in Figure 15.5.

Figure 15.5 Delete points and arc segments

You can delete multiple objects quickly by outlining a rectangle or a polygon.

Try to remove the points and arcs in the left side of the workspace as follows:
Select the Delete points button in the editing toolbar, press the left button and
drag the mouse over the points, see Figure 15.6. When the button is released
all points and arcs inside the rectangle are removed.

Powering Water Decisions 147

 Getting Started

Figure 15.6 Delete points and arcs in outlined rectangle

You may delete entire arcs and related points by first selecting the arc by the
arc selection tool, and then pressing the Delete key on the keyboard, see
Figure 15.7.

Figure 15.7 Delete selected arcs

It is also possible to delete multiple points and arc segments by enclosing

them within a polygon and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.

148 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 3 - Editing the Land Boundary

Please try the following:

1. From the editing toolbar select the Select points function

2. Right click the mouse to display the workspace context menu and select
Inside Polygon
3. Add corners to the polygon by left clicking the mouse. Make a polygon
around the line of land in the upper left corner of the window
4. Finish the polygon by double left clicking the mouse
5. Press the Delete key on the keyboard and all points within the polygon
are deleted

This course of action is illustrated in Figure 15.8.

Figure 15.8 Polygon selection

You should end up with a land boundary as shown in Figure 15.9.

Powering Water Decisions 149

 Getting Started

Figure 15.9 Final land boundary

Please note that the land boundary as shown in Figure 15.8 consists of one
open arc (with two nodes). This has been achieved by converting all land
nodes to vertices. During this process make sure that possible holes in the
land boundary are closed - depending on how you have cleaned the work-
space you might have to close holes.

15.6 Step 4 - Specification of Domain

You have to defined the domain area as a polygon. This allows the area to be
triangulated, as only closed areas (polygons) can be triangulated

A new arc closing the fjord must be drawn at the upper right corner of the
model area. This new open boundary arc uses the same nodes as the land
boundary arc. To draw this arc, select the Draw Arc tool and click on the 2
nodes at the entrance of the fjord, see Figure 15.10.

150 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 5 - Specification of Boundaries

Figure 15.10 Draw boundary arc by connecting two existing nodes

15.7 Step 5 - Specification of Boundaries

It is important to distinguish between land and open boundaries. As explained
in Step 4 - Specification of Domain, the domain area as depicted in
Figure 15.10 has both a land and an open boundary. By default the Mesh
Generator assumes that all boundaries are of type land. You will have to
specify that the boundary at the upper right corner is an open boundary.

Please select the Select Arc function in the editing toolbar and select the
Open Boundary Arc. Right click and select properties. In the dialog box
please specify the arc attribute as 2, see Figure 15.11. This is an indication to
the model simulation program that this is an open boundary.

Powering Water Decisions 151

 Getting Started

Figure 15.11 Define arc attribute of open boundary

Note: Arcs - and node attributes - are per default 0. During export of a gener-
ated mesh, all arc and node attributes with a value of 0 are converted to 1. An
attribute value of 1 indicates land. You shall therefore always use a value of 2
or higher as attribute value. Use the same attribute value for boundary nodes
and arcs that shall be exposed to the same boundary conditions.

15.8 Step 6 - Mesh Generation

You are now ready to generate a mesh.

From the Mesh menu please select the Generate Mesh… menu item. The
Triangulation dialog appears. Please specify the values as shown below in
Figure 15.12 and click Generate.

152 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 6 - Mesh Generation

Figure 15.12 Mesh generation

The Mesh Generator now calculates and draws a mesh as shown in

Figure 15.13.

Note: The Boundary Definition toolbar becomes disabled when the mesh has
been generated and the Mesh Editing toolbar is enabled instead. If the mesh
is deleted from the workspace the process is reversed. Pls. see Toolbar
Functions (p. 209).

Figure 15.13 Generated mesh

Powering Water Decisions 153

 Getting Started

15.9 Step 7 - Smooth the Land Boundary

If the generated triangles appear unsatisfactorily - e.g. being too small or too
large close to land - you have different options. One option is to smooth the
land boundary.

Please delete the mesh by selecting the Mesh menu and then the Delete
Mesh menu item. Thereafter select the Land Boundary Arc and right-click the
mouse and select Redistribute vertices. You are presented with a dialog box
as shown in Figure 15.14.

Figure 15.14 Redistribute vertices

Please specify the values as shown in Figure 15.14 and press OK.

Note: You should always try with a preview before accepting the redistribu-
tion. With very complex geometries, the redistribution can fail with an unusa-
ble land boundary as result.

The new land boundary should be as shown in Figure 15.15. As you can see,
the land boundary appears much smoother.

154 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 7 - Smooth the Land Boundary

Figure 15.15 Land boundary after redistribution

A triangulation with the new land boundary results in a mesh generation as

depicted in Figure 15.16.

Note: The points are placed much more regular along the boundary line than
what was the case with the “raw” boundary line as shown in Figure 15.13.

Powering Water Decisions 155

 Getting Started

Figure 15.16 Triangulation after redistribution of the land boundary

15.10 Step 8 - Smoothing the Mesh

Often you will have to ensure that the variation with respect to area and skew-
ness between neighbouring triangles are kept as small as possible, i.e. creat-
ing smooth transitions between different areas in the mesh.

Please select the Smooth mesh… menu item in the Mesh menu and specify
10 as the number of iterations.

In Figure 15.17 you can see the effect of smoothing the mesh.

156 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 9 - Interpolation of a Bathymetry to the Mesh

Figure 15.17 Effect of smoothing

15.11 Step 9 - Interpolation of a Bathymetry to the Mesh

You can refine a mesh in order to correlate the areas of the generated trian-
gles to the water depth. Typically you will want to have smaller triangles in
shallower areas than in deeper areas.

Please do the following:

1. Delete the mesh

2. Insert a Polygon marker in the fjord by using the Insert Polygon tool in
the Boundary Definition toolbar. Select the marker using the Select Poly-
gon tool, right click and select Properties. Use the tick box to ensure that
the zone is included in the Triangulation
3. Generate a mesh - in the Mesh menu select the Triangulate… menu item

Before you can interpolate the Z-values at the mesh nodes, you must
import scatter data to interpolate from. You add scatter data from the
Manage Scatter Data… menu item in the Data menu.

Please select the water.xyz file and specify LONG/LAT as projection. After
importing the data your display should look as shown in Figure 15.18.

Powering Water Decisions 157

 Getting Started

Figure 15.18 Scatter data view

You can now interpolate the imported scatter data to the mesh nodes. Select
the Interpolate… menu item in the Mesh menu. Accept the default values and
select Interpolate. After the interpolation has finished, click the Close button
and the depth interpolated mesh is displayed as a contour plot. See
Figure 15.19 for the result.

Note: It is possible to modify the applied colour palette for scatter data and
contours individually by selecting menu items in the Data menu and Mesh
menu, respectively.

158 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 9 - Interpolation of a Bathymetry to the Mesh

Figure 15.19 Contoured map

You can now refine the mesh in order to take the water depth into considera-
tion. In the Mesh menu select the Refine mesh… menu item, choose the
Depth/gradient option, accept the default values and click the Refine button.
A subset of the mesh before and after refinement mesh is shown in
Figure 15.20.

Figure 15.20 Detail of mesh before (left) and after (right) refinement

You should be able to notice that the areas of the triangles are smaller close
to land than out in the middle of the fjord.

Powering Water Decisions 159

 Getting Started

15.12 Step 10 - Using Polygons to Control the Node Density

Frequently you will need to have a finer resolution in some parts of your
model area than in other parts. You can to a certain degree achieve this by
refining the mesh relative to the water depth as shown in Step 9 - Interpola-
tion of a Bathymetry to the Mesh.

Another way to achieve this is by dividing the model area in different zones -
or polygon areas - and defines different maximum element areas for each
zone. This method gives you more control of the mesh generation than refin-
ing a mesh relative to the water depth.

In the present example you would probably like to have the inner part of the
fjord resolved with smaller elements than the outer part.

Please delete the mesh by selecting the Mesh menu and the Delete Mesh.
Thereafter you should divide the model area into two zones - an inner and an
outer zone. You do this by converting two vertices half-way up the fjord - one
at each side of the fjord - to nodes by right-clicking the vertex and select Ver-
tices to Nodes. You can then draw an arc between the two nodes and thus
divide the model area into two zones. This is illustrated in Figure 15.21.

Figure 15.21 Dividing an area into zones

Note: In Figure 15.21 a number of vertices have been placed between the
two nodes. The mesh generation algorithm will use these vertices when gen-
erating the mesh. In this way, You can control the layout of the meshes close
to the borderline between the two zones.

You place a polygon marker in the two zones by clicking the Insert Polygon
button in the toolbar and then click first in the outer and then in the inner
zone. This is shown below in Figure 15.22.

160 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 10 - Using Polygons to Control the Node Density

Figure 15.22 Placing polygon markers

You now have to select the zones and define the maximum element area.
Please, click the Select Polygon button in the toolbar, select the inner polygon
marker and right-click and select properties. You will be presented with a dia-
log box as shown in Figure 15.23.

Powering Water Decisions 161

 Getting Started

Figure 15.23 Polygon Properties

Make sure that the Apply Triangular mesh is selected and then specify that
the triangulation algorithm shall use a local maximum element size of 5000.
Do the same for the outer area and specify 40000 as local maximum element
size.

You are now ready to make the mesh. In the Mesh menu, select the Generate
Mesh… menu item. The result is shown in Figure 15.24.

162 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 11 - Using Polygons to Define Mesh Resolution Type

Figure 15.24 Triangulation using two zones with different maximum element areas

From Figure 15.24 it is clearly seen that the mesh elements now are smaller
in the inner part of the fjord than in the outer part.

Note: It is also possible to use the Mesh Editing feature ‘Re-triangulate

selected region’ to modify the mesh resolution in a local area after the mesh
has been generated.

15.13 Step 11 - Using Polygons to Define Mesh Resolution Type

In a river the flow direction will often be uniform whereas the flow direction in
a sea will be more complex. In areas of uniform directional flow it can often be
an advantage to model the flow pattern in a quadrangular mesh. Now try to
define the inner part of the fjord by a quadrangular mesh while the remaining
part is maintained as a triangular mesh. This requires that the inner part of the
fjord is defined by at least 4 arcs and that two of the arcs are only defined by
the nodes.

Please do the following:

1. Delete the mesh

2. Convert two vertices in the inner end of the fjord to nodes as shown in
Figure 15.25
3. Convert two vertices at the banks of the fjord to nodes and define a new
arc as shown in Figure 15.25

Powering Water Decisions 163

 Getting Started

4. Define a new polygon marker in the new inner polygon. Select the poly-
gon marker (this will highlight the polygon and show the arc attribute val-
ues)
5. Right click to select Properties. Use the tick box to define the polygon as
a quadrangular mesh and specify the options shown in Figure 15.26
6. Generate a mesh - in the Mesh menu select the Triangulate… menu item

This will result in the mesh shown in Figure 15.27.

Figure 15.25 Polygon properties for quadrangular mesh

164 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 11 - Using Polygons to Define Mesh Resolution Type

Figure 15.26 Quadrangular polygon options

Figure 15.27 Resulting mesh in inner fjord using quadrangular elements

Powering Water Decisions 165

 Getting Started

15.14 Step 12 - Analyse the mesh

To ensure that the mesh is optimal for use in the numerical model, the mesh
is analysed using the Mesh Analysis option.

First interpolate the scatter data into the node points as shown in section
15.11 while using the triangulated mesh from section 15.12. This creates the
bathymetry information that ensure that all options in the Mesh Analysis dia-
log is available.

Select Mesh in the Toolbar, Mesh Editing and then Analyse Mesh. This will
give the Analyse Mesh dialog shown in Figure 15.28.

Figure 15.28 Analysing mesh options

The two first options in the Analyse Mesh dialog calculates the time step con-
straints for each mesh element based on the CFL stability criteria. The latter
two options analyse the mesh solely defined on the mesh element geometry.

Selecting the zoom button for the smallest time step at the top of the table will
cause the display to mark the grid cell and zoom into the local area, see
Figure 15.29.

166 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 12 - Analyse the mesh

Note: Choosing some of the other analysis options will reveal that the CFL
criteria causes the most severe time restriction.

Figure 15.29 Marked grid cell for smallest restrictive time step when calculation is
based on the water level.

By using the information from the analysis it is possible to optimize the mesh
layout by modifying the mesh resolution locally around the critical mesh ele-
ments.

You can now try to optimize the mesh by adding or deleting node points using
the Mesh Editing toolbar. Note that each edition may change the result of the
analysis.

Powering Water Decisions 167

 Getting Started

168 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Menu

16 Reference Guide
The following describes the main functions that are available to you from the
menubar.

16.1 File Menu

The Mesh Generator provides you with a work environment for creating, edit-
ing and presenting detailed digital flexible meshes.

File/New Menu
You use the New menu item in the File menu to create a new mesh docu-
ment, i.e. mesh definition file. The only information you initially must specify is
the geographical projection of the mesh.

File/Open Menu
You use the Open menu item in the File menu to open an existing mesh doc-
ument file. All mesh documents have a .mdf as file extension.

16.2 Edit Menu

The edit menu provides options for undoing and redoing previous made
changes to the mesh document, for selecting and deleting points and for set-
ting different global Mesh Generator options. Global options are options that
cover all editing sessions with the Mesh Generator.

16.2.1 Undo

You use the Undo menu item to undo the last change made to the mesh doc-
ument. All changes made during an edit session are recorded and can be
undone. However, you can define a limit for the number of changes to record
from the Options menu item (p. 170).

Note: You can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-Z to activate the undo function.

16.2.2 Redo

You use the Redo menu item to redo an undo action. If you have undone too
many changes you can come back to a previous state by using the redo func-
tion.

Note: The redo stack is cleared the first time you make direct changes to a
mesh definition, e.g. inserting new nodes.
You can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-Y to activate the redo function.

Powering Water Decisions 169

 Reference Guide

16.2.3 Delete

You use the Delete menu item to delete all selected features, e.g. nodes or
arcs.

Note: You can use the keyboard shortcut Delete to activate the delete func-
tion

16.2.4 Options

You use the Options… menu item to set different Mesh Generator global
options, i.e. options that take effect in all Mesh Generator editing sessions.

The undo level specifies how many changes the Mesh Generator should
record and make available for undoing. If you are working with a very large
setup that requires a lot of memory, you could lower the level and in this way
reduce the memory needed for holding the undo buffers.

The undo level can be anywhere between 0 and 100. For very large model
setups it is recommended to apply a value below 10.

16.3 View Menu

The View menu provides functionality for overlaying the workspace area with
geographical information, for zooming in the data, for adding toolbar views
and status bar.

16.3.1 Coordinate Overlays

This menu item makes it possible to overlay the workspace area with a geo-
graphical net showing the latitudes and longitudes and a North arrow.

16.3.2 Zoom facilities

The Zoom In menu item gives access to a rubber band you can use to select
a sub-area to work with. You use the rubber band to define the sub-area. With
the band present; you outline the area by pressing the left mouse button and
dragging the band. When you release the button, the workspace area will
zoom to the specified area.

The Zoom out menu item resets the zoom level to the full workspace area.

The Zoom to Extent of Data menu item sets the zoom level such that all
data points are shown in the workspace area.

170 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

View Menu

16.3.3 Go To

The Go To menu item shows a dialog you can use to navigate in the work-
space.

Figure 16.1 The Go to dialog

You can go to:

 A specific coordinate
 A specific node in a generated mesh
 A specific element in a generated mesh
 The largest or smallest element in a generated mesh
 The smallest angle element in a generated mesh
 The deepest or highest located node in a generated mesh
 The most shallow located node in a generated mesh

The dialog also allows you to zoom in on the specified point. Setting the zoom
level to a value higher than 100 implies zooming in on a point, and values
less that 100 correspond to zooming out.

16.3.4 Drawing options

Fixed Aspect Ratio

With the Fixed Aspect Ratio menu item enabled, the workspace area will be
drawn using the same scale in both the X- and Y-directions. If you clear the
Fixed Aspect Ratio menu item, the workspace area will fill the entire editor
window.

Powering Water Decisions 171

 Reference Guide

Double Buffer
Double buffer redraw is a technique where you draw into a bitmap and then
copy the bitmap to the display. It gives you a much faster refresh rate of the
display, but at the cost of reduced available system memory.

16.3.5 Export Graphics

With the Export Graphics menu item you can copy the workspace area as an
image to the clipboard or directly save it in a file as either a bitmap or as a
Windows metafile.

This is mainly to be used when preparing presentations or for importing illus-

trations in reports.

16.3.6 Toolbar

The Toolbar menu item gives access to a toolbar selection dialog.

Note: You cannot deselect the Mesh Generator specific toolbars

16.3.7 Status Bar

The Status bar menu item toggles between showing and hiding the MIKE
Zero status bar.

16.4 Data Menu

The Data menu provides functionality for importing, exporting and converting
data.

Note: Some of these menu items are only accessible when the relevant
object has been selected.

16.4.1 Import Boundary

The Import Boundary menu lets you import an XYZ file defining the land-
water boundary. After having selected the file with the boundary information,
you have to specify additional information for the editor to correctly interpret
the XYZ data.

172 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Figure 16.2 Import boundary dialog

You need to specify:

1. The layout of the XYZ data

The data in the file must be formatted as ASCII text in three or four col-
umns with the two first columns giving the X-and Y-coordinates of the
points. The remaining one or two columns shall include connectivity
information and - optionally - a Z-coordinate defining the water depth at
the point. The connectivity column is used to define arcs. All points along
an arc - except the last point - shall have a connectivity value of 1 and
the last point shall have a connectivity value of 0.
2. The projection of the data
If the data has a different projection than the workspace area, the data
values will be converted to the projection used with the workspace area.
NOTE: The automatic conversion does not consider Datum Shift. If
required then convert the xyz data using the Datum Convert Utility before
adding the data to the setup.
3. How to convert the point values to arcs
You can choose to connect all points to one arc, i.e. omitting the connec-
tivity column in the data, or to use the connectivity information and draw
multiple arcs. Finally, you can specify a minimum length of arcs (meas-
ured in number of points). The latter can for example be used to exclude
small islands from the mesh.
4. Polygon definition
You can choose whether the imported polygons shall be all excluded
from the mesh (e.g. in the case of buildings or similar) or if they shall be

Powering Water Decisions 173

 Reference Guide

included in the mesh generation with the property of applying triangular

mesh within all polygons.

By selecting the Data Info button you can view the statistics of the XYZ file
and the minimum and maximum values of the columns.

Note: In case a vertice point during the import process is recognized to be

defined more than once (double-defined), the point is skipped.

16.4.2 Export Boundary

The Export Boundary menu gives you the option of exporting selected point
and/or arcs to an XYZ file. This can be used to e.g. import the data in other
models or if you want to manipulate the arcs with another program like e.g.
Microsoft Excel.

16.4.3 Clean

When importing boundary data you might come in a situation where either
some points are placed very close to each other or points are defined more
than once (double-defined). The triangulation algorithm cannot triangulate
areas with double-points and generates strange meshes with points located
very near each other.

With the Clean menu you have the possibility of removing nodes located near
each other. You specify a minimum distance between nodes. All nodes with a
distance less than the specified threshold value will be removed.

Note: The algorithm can only remove nodes - and not vertices - located near
each other. In case your data contains two or more vertices - or a node and a
vertex - placed near each other, you will have to manually resolve the prob-
lem. Zoom to the point and move or remove points in order to solve the prob-
lem. The mesh algorithm will - in case of double points - abort the mesh
calculation and report the location of the double points.

16.4.4 Convert Nodes to Vertices

With this menu item you can convert selected nodes to vertices.

Note: Changing a node to a vertex results in merging two arcs into one arc.
You cannot convert a node representing a single arc to a vertex.

16.4.5 Convert Vertices to Nodes

With this menu item you can convert selected vertices to nodes.

174 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Note: Changing a vertex to a node results in splitting a single arc into two
smaller arcs.

16.4.6 Redistribute Vertices

This menu item provides you with a dialog you can use to redistribute the ver-
tices along selected arcs, e.g. ensuring that all vertices are place with at con-
stant distance apart.

Figure 16.3 Arc Redistribution dialog

You can redistribute the vertices along the selected arc(s) in three different
ways:

 You can specify the number of vertices along the arc(s)

 You can specify the distance between the vertices along the arc(s)
 You can divide each segment along the arc(s) in a specified number of
segments

The selected arcs are curve-fitted following a spline curve. You can specify
the spline factor. A smaller spline factor leads to a smoother curve, but at the
cost of moving points.

Note: This menu item is only accessible after you graphically have selected
one or more arcs.

Powering Water Decisions 175

 Reference Guide

16.4.7 Manage Scatter Data

The Manage Scatter Data menu gives you a dialog from where you can man-
age your scatter data. You can add, remove or reduce scatter data sets as
well as convert scatter data points to nodes or arcs.

It is also possible to modify individual scatter data points using the Scatter
Data Toolbar (p. 220).

NOTE: Reducing scatter data sets using the Reduce Scatter Data Set button
saves the edited data in a new file. Modifying individual scatter data points
using the Scatter Data Toolbar will modify the original scatter data set.

Scatter data is typically used to interpolate bathymetry values to the mesh

elements. The range of the various data sources may be viewed at the bot-
tom of the dialog for all files or for a selected file. It is possible to zoom to the
extent of the range of all scatter data or a selected file.

Furthermore you can choose which data files to display in the graphics.

Figure 16.4 The Manage Scatter Data dialog

Add scatter data

You can use the following type of files as scatter data:

176 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

 XYZ files, ASCII files organised in columns – X,Y coordinates and the
bathymetry value (Z) in the first three columns
NOTE: Headers in xyz files are not allowed

 DFS2 files, DHI 2D data files containing bathymetries.

NOTE: only values below the specified land value are used

 DFSU files, DHI flexible mesh files

NOTE: the values are obtained from the static item bathymetry value

 Mesh files, files exported from the Mesh Generator with a mesh definition
and bathymetry value
 TIFF files, georeferenced raster files containing elevation values

NOTE: When you select a xyz file you have to specify the map projection for
the data values. In case this map projection is different from the Workspace
Projection the coordinate values will be converted automatically however the
conversion will not consider Datum Shift. If required then convert the xyz data
using the Datum Convert Utility before adding the data to the setup.

From this menu item you also get the opportunity to Convert scatter data to
nodes and arcs. (Note: when you select a dfs2, dfsu or mesh file as scatter
data the file must not be open in another editor).

It is possible to prioritize the data in the interpolation process by applying dif-

ferent weights to the data sources (see Prioritize Scatter Data (p. 180)).

Convert scatter data

With the Convert Scatter Data dialog you can convert imported scatter data to
arcs or nodes and thereby ensure that the points from the scatter data are
included in the mesh generation afterwards.

Additionally, it is also possible to automatically assign a user-defined attribute

value to the scatter data during conversion by defining an integer value for
the ‘a’ variable.

Powering Water Decisions 177

 Reference Guide

Figure 16.5 Convert scatter data dialog

If you convert scatter data to arcs or nodes you should normally also remove
the scatter data file from the list of inserted scatter data file.

Note: The action takes effect when you click the OK button and cannot be
reversed.

Reduce Scatter Data Set

The Reduce Scatter Data Set menu item displays a dialog that allows you to
reduce the number of scatter data points. This can be useful in order to
reduce the time it takes to interpolate a bathymetry to a generated mesh.

If the scatter data you have imported has a much finer resolution than the
area of mesh element, it is often advantageous to reduce the amount of scat-
ter data.

When reducing the data you first specify in the Manage Scatter Data dialog if
you want to reduce all the scatter data or only the data from a specific file.

178 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Figure 16.6 Scatter data reduction dialog

The Mesh Generator offers three different algorithms for reducing the amount
of scatter data:

 You can reduce the number of scatter points by defining a maximum

number of scatter points per mesh element.
This algorithm scans all scatter points and associates them to the
mesh elements. You can specify a maximum number of points per ele-
ment to retain. You also specify a threshold value for the number of
points to retain per pseudo-element outside the convex hull – the outer
domain of the mesh area. The pseudo-element is taken as an element
with an area corresponding to the largest true element.

 You can reduce the number of scatter data based by defining a maxi-
mum number of points per square unit
This algorithm divides the area in a number of equally sized squares
and retains only the first number of specified points per square.

 You can reduce the number of scatter data based on the proximity of
scatter points.
This algorithm scans all scatter point and detects and removes all
points located within the specified distance from the actual point.

Note: When you reduce a scatter data set you have to save the reduced scat-
ter data set to a new file. The new file will be written as an XYZ file.

Powering Water Decisions 179

 Reference Guide

16.4.8 Prioritize Scatter Data

The Prioritize Scatter Data menu item displays a dialog that allows you to
apply different weights for specified scatter data sets and define a sequence
of prioritization that is used when you Interpolate the mesh bathymetry.

Figure 16.7 The Prioritization dialog

To enable the prioritization functionality you must enable the 'Use Prioritiza-
tion' check box.

You can define one or several weight combinations in the lower part of the
dialog. The corresponding Weight IDs can then be selected for global and/or
local prioritization.

The local prioritization are defined in the upper part of the dialog. To be able
to use prioritization for only a part of the domain, a Prioritization area must be
defined beforehand. In case of several local prioritization areas the order
entry defines the sequence of the interpolation.

Prioritization area
A prioritization area is a user defined area where a specific prioritization
weight combination is to be used. Prioritization areas are different from the

180 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

polygons used for specifying mesh resolutions and mesh type. To create
areas for local prioritization use the Prioritization Toolbar (p. 223).

Introduction
The input topographical data typically originate from various sources. The
multiple sources are reflected in the variation in spatial extent, resolution and
quality. As an example one may have data in a coarse resolution for a region
and additionally some fine resolution LIDAR for a subarea. For the subarea
one would typically solely use the LIDAR data for constructing the bathymetry
whereas for the remaining area the coarser regional wide data would be
used. Thus the user would preferably assign some rules to the interpolation
of the scatter data.

The interpolation prioritization functionality in the mesh editor enables the

user to grade the quality of the scatter data globally for the whole model
domain as well as locally for subareas of the model domain. The accuracy
associated with the various sources may further vary significantly. This in turn
may result in fine scale data being impacted by less accurate data giving rise
to synthetic smoothing in the interpolation. To reduce such effects the prioriti-
zation of source data may be used. The prioritization is carried out by apply-
ing weights to the individual data sets. These weights may be assigned
globally and locally.

How to use the prioritization functionality

In the step-by-step example four data sets are used for interpolating the
bathymetry values in a generated mesh:

1. Regional lines distributed across the whole domain

2. Local lines in a smaller area
3. Measurements from distinct sub area in front of the harbour
4. Dummy settings for the harbour area

Please see the outline of the applied scatter data sets in the figure below.

Powering Water Decisions 181

 Reference Guide

Step 1: Import data

The data can be loaded into the Mesh Generator using the menu item: Man-
age Scatter Data. The various data sources are added one by one by clicking
the 'Add…' button and selecting the data file. Finally click the 'Apply' button to
update the overview.

Once the data files have been selected the window will look similar to the one
in Figure 16.4. Note that at the bottom of this window the range of the various
data sources may be viewed. Furthermore the zoom button can zoom to the
extent defined by a selected data set as shown below.

Step 2: Create prioritization incidents

The next step is to assign prioritization weights to the data sources. This will
be done locally as well as globally. The prioritization will be utilized such that
for the area in front of the harbour only the survey data will be applied and in
the area covered by local lines the regional lines and local lines will be prior-
itized by 10% and 90%, respectively. Thus a set prioritization weights are
needed for each of the data sets.

To define the weights access the prioritization dialog through the menu item
Prioritize Scatter Data. In the dialog that appears the lower part of the window

182 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

defines the weight combinations. To activate these you must enable the 'Use
Prioritization' check box. Subsequently one can add any number of weight
combinations.

In the example shown in Figure 16.7 two weight combinations have been
defined: one which only takes the survey data into account and one which
uses a combination of Regional lines and Survey lines. Note that the weights
must be non-negative values and cannot all be zero.

Step 3: Define prioritization areas

To apply local weights one needs to define areas for which the local weights
are to be applied. This is done through the Prioritization Toolbar (p. 223) used
for creating and editing prioritization polygons.

Using these tools one can define, move, add, delete and select nodes of a
prioritization area. The user is prompted to supply a name for the defined
area to be used in the Local prioritization dialog later. Once the area has been
defined the view will look similar to the one below.

The SurveyArea area encompasses data from the WeightID Survey and the
LocalLinesArea data from WeightID Vicinity.

Step 4: Apply prioritization incidents to areas

The next step is to assign the weight combination to the individual prioritiza-
tion area. This is done through the Prioritize Scatter Data menu. Once the pri-
oritization areas have been defined the upper part of the dialog will be
populated with the area names. The only remaining step is to assign the
appropriate weight combination ID to the individual prioritization areas. The

Powering Water Decisions 183

 Reference Guide

menu will look similar to Figure 16.7 once the weight combinations have been
assigned.

Note that outside the two defined areas (global prioritization) no prioritization
is applied which means that all data sources are pooled into one data set
which is then used to interpolate the data onto the mesh.

Step 5: Generate mesh and interpolate bathymetry

The next step is to generate the mesh and carry out the interpolation.
A comparison of the resulting mesh with and witout prioritization of the scatter
data is displayed in Figure 16.8.

Figure 16.8 Resulting mesh bathymetry

Upper: with prioritization of scatter data
Lower: without priotization of scatter data

184 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

16.4.9 Scatter Data Visualisation

View Scatter Data

This menu item toggles visualization of scatter data. Drawing large amount of
scatter data can be time consuming.Toggling scatter data visualization off can
improve the responsiveness of the Mesh Generator.

You can define which scatter data sources to display from the Manage Scat-
ter Data dialog (see p. 176).

Note: The menu item is only active if scatter data have been imported.

Scatter Data Point Size

This menu items toggles the size of the scatter data points to be shown in the
display. You have the option to choose between 10 sizes, see Figure 16.9.
The point size is not affected by the zoom level.

Figure 16.9 Scatter data point size: 1 to 10

Scatter Data Palette

You may define your own attribute palette for the scatter data point attributes.

View Scatter Data Legend

This menu item toggles between showing and hiding the colour legend that
visualizes the colour ramp used when drawing scatter data points.

Note: The menu item is only active if scatter data have been imported.

16.5 Mesh Menu

The Mesh menu provides functionality for importing, generating and export-
ing a mesh.

16.5.1 Import mesh

The “Import mesh” functionality can be utilized as a starting point for creating
a new mesh or for converting mesh files into dfsu files.

Powering Water Decisions 185

 Reference Guide

When selecting to import a mesh file (or the mesh file information contained
in a dfsu file) a pop-up window will ask if you want to generate information for
Arc Editing.

Pressing NO to generate information for Arc Editing will cause the mesh to be
added as follows:

 The existing mesh structure will be added and become subject to

changes using the Mesh Editing Toolbar (p. 223).

Pressing YES to generate information for Arc Editing will, besides including
the existing mesh structure, enable additional mesh features to become avail-
able in the Mesh Generator setup the following way:

 The external boundaries (land and open boundaries) are imported as

arcs with the given boundary code attribute becoming the corresponding
arc attribute.
 Existing non-triangulated areas (e.g. islands) within the selected file are
detected and corresponding polygons with property “Exclude from mesh”
will be created.
 The selected file is added to the list of scatter data files and the bathym-
etry values from the scatter data will be shown in the display.

Note: Internal polygons that outlined areas for e.g. quadrangular mesh or
local maximum element area during generation of the original mesh cannot
be derived from the mesh. Hence the mesh structure may be modified if the
mesh is regenerated.

16.5.2 Generate mesh

You use the Generate Mesh... menu item to generate a mesh of the area.
There are a certain number of rules to follow in order to secure a successful
mesh generation:

 At least three points are required for starting the generation

 Mesh generation is only performed within polygons - a polygon is implic-

itly made of one or more arcs. In order to generate a mesh for a coastal
area, you will therefore have to have one polygon covering the full area
to be modelled.

 The mesh algorithm cannot handle double-defined points. You will have
to remove all double-points before a mesh can be generated. You can
either remove double-points through the Clean menu item in the Data
menu or by editing the points

186 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

Mesh generation
The Generate Mesh ...menu leads to a Mesh Generation dialog box from
where you can initiate the mesh generation or specify a number options con-
trolling the mesh generation.

Figure 16.10 Mesh Generation dialog

Generation of the triangular part of the mesh is controlled through three

parameters that are specified in the Mesh Generation dialog.

The parameters are:

1. The maximum allowable element area measured in m^2 or deg^2

depending on the projection of the workspace area. The algorithm gener-
ally seeks to maximize the areas of the elements
2. The smallest allowable angle between two sides in a triangle. This
parameter controls the skewness of the triangles
3. The maximum number of generated nodes

After the mesh has been calculated the Generate Mesh ... dialog will report
the number of elements and nodes that have been generated both for the tri-
angular and the quadrangular part.

Note: Generation of a quadrangular part of the mesh is controlled through the

Polygon properties dialog (see p.214).

16.5.3 Smooth Mesh

The Smooth Mesh menu item can be used to smooth the triangular part of a
generated mesh. Smoothing a mesh means that the differences with respec-
tive to area and angles between neighbouring elements are reduced, i.e. the
elements are homogenised.

Powering Water Decisions 187

 Reference Guide

Figure 16.11 Smoothing dialog

Two options can be included when smoothing the mesh:

 Smoothing constrained by mesh criterion

Prior to mesh generation some constraints on the element area and the
angles may be applied. When smoothing the mesh one may disable
these constraints by deselecting the check box.

 Leave mesh nodes at arcs untouched

If this check box is deselected ALL internal nodes may be relocated. Oth-
erwise, if a node originally was part of a defined arc or is a single user
defined node, then the node is not allowed to be moved during the
smoothing.

Note: The smoothing algorithm only applies to triangular mesh elements. If

the mesh after smoothing remains the same the overall mesh is as homoge-
nised as can be.

16.5.4 Interpolate

The Interpolation menu item is used for interpolation of scatter data to the
mesh nodes. Typically, the scatter data represents the bathymetry in the
area, but it could also be other types of spatial data.

Note: In order to perform an interpolation you have to have imported some

scatter data to interpolate from. You import scatter data using the Manage
Scatter Data menu item in the Data Menu (p. 172).

188 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

Figure 16.12 Interpolation dialog

Prioritization
If you want to utilize prioritization in the interpolation you have to have defined
the prioritization weights beforehand using the Prioritize Scatter Data menu
item in the Data Menu (p. 180).

Value from scatter data

If you have a very dense set of scatter data points, you can dramatically
decrease the interpolation time by simply assigning the node value from the
closest located scatter point. You do this by clicking the Set value from scatter
data check box – you should at the same time set a reasonably maximum
search distance.

NOTE: Node points assigned a value in this way will not be included in the
overall interpolation. E.g. the presence of break lines will not be considered.

Powering Water Decisions 189

 Reference Guide

Triangles
You can select between two different algorithms for performing the interpola-
tion for the triangular part:

 Natural Neighbour interpolation

The Natural Neighbour method - which is particularly effective for dealing

with a variety of spatial data themes exhibiting clustered or highly linear
distributions - is a geometric estimation technique that uses natural
neighbourhood regions generated around each point in the data set. The
natural neighbourhood regions are determined by creating a triangulated
irregular network from the scatter data points.

With the Natural Neighbour method four additional points can optionally
be used in the interpolation. The position of the four points can be con-
trolled through the Size of bounding window parameter. The points will
be placed at the lower left, upper left, lower right and upper right corner
of the workspace area, respectively. The parameter specifies the dis-
tance from the four points to the data extent area. The water depth value
at the four points will be defined as the extrapolation value.

You can specify a node value to be used in situations where the Mesh
Generator needs to extrapolate in order to calculate the water depth at a
node value.

 Linear interpolation

The linear method uses a mesh generated from the scatter points when
doing the interpolation. For each point to be interpolated a surrounding
triangle is determined and a linear interpolation based on the node val-
ues is made.

Quadrangles
For the quadrangular part the interpolation settings are set individually for
each of the polygon areas. The areas defined by quadrangles are listed at the
bottom of the Interpolation dialog. For each quadrangular mesh area the
interpolation method used is listed. Further you may choose to zoom to the
area in question by clicking the zoom button. Finally the Edit button grants
access to the interpolation settings for the individual quadrangular mesh
areas.

190 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

Figure 16.13 Interpolation options for areas with quadrangular mesh

Within the quadrangular interpolation options you may choose the same
methods available for the triangular part. In addition you can choose the
Inverse Distance Weighted method that requires a strength value in both the
flow direction and the transversal flow direction. The latter gives the possibil-
ity of applying a greater weight to data in the flow direction compared to data
lying in the transversal direction.

See also Setting up zones with quadrangular mesh elements (p. 215).

16.5.5 Refine Mesh

A mesh may be refined using one or both of the following methods

 Face bisection
 Depth/Gradient

Face bisection
You can refine a mesh by subdividing the faces of the existing elements. This
approach is termed 'Face bisection'. The bisection method is designed to
only change the size of the elements in a given mesh without changing the
overall quality of the mesh, i.e. the angles of the refined mesh will not become
less than the original mesh. The approach is illustrated in Figure 16.14.

Powering Water Decisions 191

 Reference Guide

Figure 16.14 Approach for bisection of elements

Upper: Approach for triangular element
Lower: Approach for quadrilateral element

The only parameter that is required is the number of bisections to apply. Once
this has been selected the start button can clicked and the progress will visu-
alized through a progress bar.

The number of elements grows by a factor of four per bisection applied. Thus
using e.g. 3 bisections will make the number of elements grow by 43=64. In
general try to select the number of bisections in the range 1-4. In the present
version you cannot create a mesh with more than 500.000 elements via
bisection.

Note: The bisection method may also be invoked when exporting the gener-
ated mesh to either a mesh file or a dfsu file.

Depth/Gradient
You can refine a mesh in order to take the water depth into account when
generating a mesh. Doing so requires:

 That the workspace area has been interpolated with respect to water
depth
 That at least one zone has been defined. A zone is a polygon that can be
marked for inclusion or not in the triangulation. You define a zone by
placing a zone marker within a polygon and marking the zone (right click
the zone point and select properties) for taking part in triangulation or
not. You can give the zone a name for easier identification

Note: This feature does not work if the mesh contains any quadrangular ele-
ments.

192 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

Note: A polygon is a closed loop composed of one closed arc, or two or more
open arcs. A polygon is not explicitly defined by the user. It is automatically
generated when an arc, or a set of arcs, is closed. A polygon can (but does
not have to be) assigned to be a zone.

Figure 16.15 Mesh refinement by depth dialog

The refinement option dialog lets you specify the correlation between element
area and water depth or bed level gradient. You can specify both linear and
non-linear by choosing the curve (double-click on the curve and drag the gen-
erated knot) dependency.

16.5.6 Analyse Mesh

You can analyse the mesh for its applicability in a simulation by evaluating the
restricting time step for each mesh element. The minimum time step will
define the maximum time step for the entire simulation.

Note: You have to be in Mesh Editing mode in order to analyse a mesh.

By using the editing facilities in the Mesh Editing Toolbar (p. 223) you have
the possibility to modify the mesh in selected regions in order to increase the
minimum time step and thus decrease the total simulation time for your
model.

You may analyse the mesh using different options:

 Smallest time step based on the water level

 Smallest time step based on the water depth
 Smallest area

Powering Water Decisions 193

 Reference Guide

 Smallest angle

The smallest time step, dtmin, for each element is found by the limiting CFL
number, the length of the smallest face of the element, le, and the total water
depth, Dt, as follows:

1
dt min = ---  CFL  l e   9,8D t  (16.1)
2

The resulting table in the dialog contains the upper most restrictive values
and you have the option to zoom into each of the elements in the table.
Note that you may control the number of elements in the table.

Figure 16.16 Analyse Mesh dialog

16.5.7 Arc/Mesh editing modes

The mesh editor has two main modes when editing:

 Arc editing mode

 Mesh editing mode

194 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Menu

The Arc editing mode is used for setting up the arcs and single nodes which
make up the skeleton for generating the mesh. The Arc editing mode is typi-
cally only used initially to get the overall working area defined along with
delineation of coast lines or other specific topographical features in the
domain.

The Mesh editing mode on the other hand is used when modifying an
already generated mesh e.g. merging triangular elements or moving individ-
ual mesh nodes. Keep in mind that if the mesh is subsequently regenerated
all mesh editing will be lost.

To switch between the two modes select the 'Mesh' menu and then choose
either 'Arc Editing' or 'Mesh Editing'. When selecting Arc editing a possible
mesh will be displayed by a paler shade of colour and any Mesh editing tools
are inactive. Similarly choosing the mesh editing mode inactivates Arc editing
tools and all arcs in the set-up will be visualized by a stronger mesh colour,
see Mesh Visualisation (p. 196).

Note: You can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl-M to toggle between the two
modes.

16.5.8 Delete Mesh

The Delete Mesh menu item deletes a generated mesh.

16.5.9 Export Mesh

You use the Export Mesh functionality to export a generated mesh to a file for
use in one of the simulation models in the FM-series.

Note: You cannot use the Mesh Generator document file (.mdf-file) with the
simulation models. You will have to export the mesh to a .mesh file in order to
use it in a model simulation.

Export as
Typically, you will export the mesh as a .mesh file - an ASCII-file defining the
node positions, the element topology and the depth at the nodes. This infor-
mation defines the necessary information for the FM-simulation models for
setting up the computational grid.

You can also select to save the data as a .dfsu file. Such a file cannot be used
as a mesh-definition file with the simulation models. However, you can use
this possibility to generate e.g. bottom friction and eddy viscosity maps for the
simulation models.

Powering Water Decisions 195

 Reference Guide

Additional refine mesh

The Face bisection may also be invoked when exporting the generated mesh
to either a mesh file or a dfsu file. In that case the program generates two
files:

1. The original mesh in the format (*.dfsu or *.mesh) selected by the user
2. A refined mesh where the refinement algorithm has been applied.

The latter file will be given the name 'filename_refined.*' where the original
mesh is saved in a file named filename.*. The extension being either mesh or
dfsu.

Note: The additional refined mesh is only generated if the user checks the
'Create refined mesh'. This feature may be used to carry out simulations with
same mesh structure but different resolutions.

Example
To make a .dfsu file including e.g. a bottom friction map instead of bathymetry
you do the following:

1. Generate the mesh you want to use in a simulation

2. Specify bottom friction values covering the model area as either a XYZ-
file or as a .dfs2-file
3. Load the mesh file into the Mesh Generator
4. Add the bottom friction values as scatter data
5. Interpolate the bottom friction values to the mesh
6. Export the Mesh to a .dfsu-file through the Export Mesh menu.
You can give a descriptive name to the data you export, e.g. "Bottom
Friction.dfsu".

16.5.10 Mesh Visualisation

Draw mesh
This menu item toggles between displaying and hiding a generated mesh.

Mesh colour
This menu items toggles the main colour of the mesh shown in the display.
You have the option to choose between black, yellow, red or blue. The shade
of the colour is determined by the choice of Arc/Mesh editing modes (p. 194).

View Mesh Element Numbers

This menu item toggles between drawing mesh element numbers in each
generated mesh element.

196 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Shoreline Menu

View Mesh Node Numbers

This menu item toggles between drawing node numbers at each generated
mesh node.

Note: Some menu items are only accessible after a mesh has been gener-
ated or loaded.

16.5.11 Contour Visualisation

Contour type
With this menu you can toggle between showing the interpolated water depth
as a box contour map or as a shaded contour map. A box contour map differs
from a shaded contour map by colouring a triangle according to the depth of
the centre of gravity point of the triangle. A shaded contour map is drawn
without relation to the generated mesh.

You also have the option to set the transparency of the contour map.

Contour palette
You may define your own attribute palette for the contour map.

View Scatter Data Legend

This menu item toggles between showing and hiding the colour legend that
visualizes the colour ramp used when drawing the contour map.

Note: The last menu item is only active if a contour map exist.

16.6 Shoreline Menu

The Shoreline Menu provides functionality for generating and exporting the
input files necessary for running the Shoreline Morphology module in MIKE
21/3 Coupled Model FM.

Note:
- The Shoreline Morphology module can only be applied for domains defined
in a projected coordinate system.
- exported (.xy) or (.xyz) files must be provided in metric units

16.6.1 Manage shoreline data

You use this menu to define and generate the arcs representing the outline of
the baseline and the coastline, respectively, to use as input to the Shoreline
morphology model.

In order for the Shoreline morphology model to work the following conditions
must be considered:

Powering Water Decisions 197

 Reference Guide

 The points along the baseline defines the resolution of the shoreline
model
 The number of points on the coastline must be 1 more than the number
of points on the baseline
 The points on the coastline should be located to match the centre loca-
tion of the baseline sections
 The extension of the coastline must be sufficient to cross all normals to
be baseline

Note:
- The Shoreline Morphology module can only be applied for domains defined
in a projected coordinate system.
- exported (.xy) or (.xyz) files must be provided in metric units

Figure 16.17 Manage Shoreline Data dialog

Attribute values
You must define the arc attribute value for the baseline arc and coastline arc,
respectively.

The start point of the resulting baseline, and hence the direction, is defined by
the node point with the lowest attribute value as shown in Figure 16.18. In
case the node point attributes in ends of the arc are the same, the start point
will be the western most point.

The coastline direction is defined in similar way as the baseline.

198 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Shoreline Menu

Figure 16.18 Definition of baseline direction and positive distance. Node point Attrib-
ute value in start point is smaller than attribute value in end point

Modify coastline arc

Having defined the baseline and coastline arc, the coastline can be modified
to match the model requirements by pressing the button 'Modify coastline
arc'. The display will be updated to show the modified coastline points.

Figure 16.19 Example of coastline that match model requirements

Pressing Cancel will cause the coastline arc to revert to the original. Pressing
OK will update the arc and create vertices in the modified point positions.

16.6.2 Export shoreline data

You use the Export Shoreline data functionality to export the defined baseline
and coastline to xyz files for use in the Shoreline Morphology model.

Note: you can only export the coastline data if the number of points on the
coastline exceeds the number of points on the baseline by 1.

Powering Water Decisions 199

 Reference Guide

Figure 16.20 Export Shoreline Data dialog

16.6.3 Manage edge map

In this menu you can generate the edge map that will match the mesh ele-
ments to a given coastline ID in the Shoreline Morphology module.

First define the arc attribute of the arc defining the limiting line for the edge
map extension from the defined baseline.

Note: The Shoreline Morphology module can only be applied for domains
defined in a projected coordinate system.

Figure 16.21 Manage Edge Map dialog

Create edge map

Having defined the baseline and edge map line, the edge map values is cre-
ated by pressing the button 'Create edge map'. The display will be updated to
show the created edge map values.

Pressing Cancel will cause the edge map values to revert to the original.
Pressing OK will update the edge map values in memory.

IMPORTANT: Many coastlines are concave in shape. For such a coast-

line, the baseline will usually also be concave. In this case, lines extend-
ing perpendicular to the baseline orientation (from the baseline nodes
into the sea) will at some point cross each other as indicated in
Figure 16.22. If these crossings happen closer to the baseline than the
limiting line for the edge map extension (i.e. inside the area to be cov-
ered by the edge map), the generated edge map will not be correct.
Thus the limiting line must be placed as indicated in the below figure to
ensure that a correct edge map is generated by the shoreline tool.

200 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Shoreline Menu

Figure 16.22 Example of concave coastline valid edge map extension

16.6.4 Export edge map

You use the Export Edge Map functionality to export the generated edge map
values to a dfsu file for use in the Shoreline Morphology model.

Figure 16.23 Export Edge Map dialog

16.6.5 Manage profiles

In this menu you can generate cross-shore profiles to use in the Shoreline
Morphology model. Each point on the coastline will need to be allocated to a
profile, that being the same profile or varying profiles along the coastline.

Powering Water Decisions 201

 Reference Guide

Figure 16.24 Definition of profile

Note:
- The profile is considered to be perpendicular to the baseline section how-
ever it doesn't need to extend to the baseline.
- The Shoreline Morphology module can only be applied for domains defined
in a projected coordinate system.
- exported (.xy) or (.xyz) files must be provided in metric units

Figure 16.25 Manage profiles dialog

Profile extension
A profile in the Shoreline Morphology model is described by a number of
points defining the bed level at a certain distance from the baseline. The pro-
file is resolved by an equidistant grid that is defined by three parameters:

202 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Shoreline Menu

1. Profile start
Distance from the coastline position to the start of the profile (up on land,
i.e. negative distance)
2. Profile end
Distance from the coastline position to the end of the profile (in water, i.e.
positive distance)
3. Number of grid points
(i.e. the grid spacing in the profile is found by
(Profile end - profile start)/Number of grid points)

NOTE: The profile extension is defined by the same number of grid points
along the coastline. It is possible to describe shorter profiles locally by setting
the distance value and z-value to delete value in the superfluous points.

Profile lines
You can define a number of profile lines simultaneously by adding lines and
selecting various Coast ID numbers.

You can derive the Z-values for a profile in one of two ways:

 Z-values from mesh

 Z-values from external files

Using Z-values from mesh require that an interpolated mesh bathymetry is

contained in the Mesh Generator setup. I.e. the bathymetry mesh must be
loaded prior to generating the profiles if not already displayed.

When deriving the Z-values the bathymetry values along the defined equidis-
tantly spaced profile line is obtained from the mesh bathymetry.

Using Z-values from external files require that you select an ascii file (.xy
or.xyz) containing a profile bathymetry defined by points defining the distance
to the coastline and the bed level.
When deriving the z-values the bathymetry values along the defined equidis-
tantly spaced profile line is obtained by interpolating the data given in the
external file.

16.6.6 Export profiles

You use the Export Profiles functionality to export the generated profiles.

You can select between two export options:

 Single profile
 Varying profiles

Powering Water Decisions 203

 Reference Guide

If you select to output a single profile, you need to select the CoastID for the
given profile and specify the name of the ascii file (.xyz), in which the profile
data is to be saved. The file will contain three columns representing distance,
z-level and a dummy value 0, respectively.

If you select to output varying profiles, you need to specify the name of the
data file (.dfs2), in which the profile data is to be saved. The file will contain
the profile data for each point along the coastline, given in the two items dis-
tance and bed level, respectively.

The profile data for the CoastID's not explicitly defined in the Manage Profiles
dialog will be derived from interpolation using the nearest defined profiles.

Figure 16.26 Export Profiles dialog

16.7 Options Menu

This menu lets you set different options with respect to projection, workspace
area, various graphics parameters and mesh editing.

16.7.1 Projection

This menu item gives you the possibility of selecting or changing the projec-
tion of the workspace area or data. If data points have already been inserted
in the area, they will also be converted to the new projection.

Figure 16.27 Workspace projection dialog

204 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Options Menu

Note: The automatic conversion of coordinates does not consider any datum
transformation. If this is required then use the MIKE Zero Datum convert util-
ity to convert the data before entering the data into the Mesh Generator.

16.7.2 Workspace

From this menu you can redefine the size of the workspace area.

Note: you have to "Zoom Out" in order to redraw the workspace area to the
new extent.

16.7.3 Import Graphic Layers

This menu lets you import image files and use them as background in the
workspace area. You have to specify the path of the images. In case the
image is georeferenced the positioning and extent of the image in the work-
space area is automatically set. Otherwise you have to define the position by
specifying the coordinates to the image origin (lower left corner) and the
extent of the image in metres or degrees.

Note: You specify the image origin and extent by clicking the Edit button in
the Import Layers dialog.

Figure 16.28 Image Manager and Overlay Manager dialog

Powering Water Decisions 205

 Reference Guide

16.7.4 Graphics Settings

The Graphics setting menu let you specify the symbol and colour for nodes,
vertices, arcs and polygons.

Figure 16.29 Graphics settings dialog

16.7.5 Use Attribute Palette

You may define your own attribute palette for the point attributes.

This menu toggles between using the attribute palette or not.

16.7.6 Mesh Editing Options

During a mesh editing process you may want to avoid the pop-up windows
attached to the editing of adding, deleting and editing mesh nodes. The Mesh
Editing Options dialog enables you to define and activate different types of
pop-up windows used during the mesh editing process.

206 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Window Menu

Figure 16.30 Mesh Editing Options dialog

16.8 Window Menu

This provides you the standard Windows views, and allows you to switch
between different open windows.

Powering Water Decisions 207

 Reference Guide

208 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Navigate Toolbar

17 Toolbar Functions
The following describes the main editing functions that are available to you
from the toolbar. In the process of generating a mesh you will work in two
modes which will influence on the availability of the toolbar functions:

 Generation mode
During the initial generation and interpolation of the mesh you will mainly
use the Boundary Definition Toolbar and Scatter Data Toolbar

 Editing mode
If adjustments of the generated mesh or editions in existing old files are
needed you will mainly use the Mesh Editing Toolbar.

17.1 Navigate Toolbar

You use the Navigate toolbar to zoom and pan in the workspace area.

Icon Description

Zoom on specified region in the workspace. You define the

region by outlining it with the rubber band

Zoom to the full workspace area

Recall the previous zoom definition

Establish the next zoom definition, effectively undo a previous

zoom action

Pan
Note: Pan can also be activated by pressing the Enter key and
dragging the mouse

Toggles between displaying and hiding the coordinate system

grid

These functions are also available from the workspace context menu, i.e. by
right-clicking in the workspace area.

Powering Water Decisions 209

 Toolbar Functions

17.2 Boundary Definition Toolbar

You use the functions to:

 Insert nodes, arcs and polygons

 Select points, nodes and polygons
 Move, delete or remove points
 Select and insert break lines

Icon Description Comment

Left button selects node or

vertex
Use this function to select nodes
Ctrl + left button adds to
selection

Left button selects arc

Use this function to select an arc Ctrl + left button adds to
selection

Use this function to select a polygon Left button selects polygon

(i.e. a marker placed inside a polyon). marker
You can through the polygon context
menu define whether the polygon Ctrl + left button adds to
shall be included in the triangulation selection

Left button to insert a new

node
Use this function to insert nodes Ctrl + left button inserts a
new node and opens node
property window

Left button inserts vertex

Shift + left button inserts end
node
Use this function to draw arcs
Shift + right button inserts
node
Esc removes last vertex

Left button inserts new poly-

gon marker
Use this function to insert polygons
(i.e. a marker placed inside a polyon) Ctrl + left button inserts new
polygon marker and opens
polygon property window

210 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definition Toolbar

Icon Description Comment

Left button moves node, ver-

Use this function to move a point
tex or polygon marker

Use this function to delete a set of

selected points. Left mouse button deletes
You can select a number of points for object (node, vertex, polygon
deletion by dragging the cursor with or segment of an arc)
the left button pressed

Use this function to select break line Left button selects break line

Left button inserts vertex

Right button opens context
Use this function to draw break line menu where you can insert
end node for break line
Esc removes last vertex

Right button opens context

All functions
menu

Shift + alt + left button moves

All functions
the centre of the window

All functions Del deletes current selection

Note: The Boundary Definition toolbar is only available when you are in the
Arc Editing mode.

17.2.1 Point properties

You can use the Point properties dialog to:

 Adjust the geographical coordinates of the point

 Specify a depth value at the point

Powering Water Decisions 211

 Toolbar Functions

Figure 17.1 Point properties dialog

If the point is a node you can also specify an attribute value. The attribute
value is used by the simulation setup editor to distinguish between different
stretches of the open boundaries in the mesh, i.e. the stretches of the convex
hull (outer line) where you have to specify a boundary condition.

Note: During export of a generated mesh, all arc and node attributes with a
value of 0 are converted to 1. An attribute value of 1 indicates land. You shall
therefore always use a value of 2 or higher as attribute value. Use the same
attribute value for boundary nodes and arcs that shall be exposed to the
same boundary conditions.

17.2.2 Arc properties

You use the Arc properties dialog to uniquely identify the boundaries in the
mesh. The mesh includes two types of boundaries:

1. Land boundary, i.e. a boundary line that separates land from water.
When you use the mesh in a simulation, the computational engine implic-
itly defines a zero velocity boundary condition perpendicular to the arc
2. Open boundary, i.e. a boundary line where you when setting up a simula-
tion shall prescribe the boundary condition

Each boundary in your model setup corresponds to one or more consecutive

arcs in the mesh definition. In order for the model setup editor to distinguish
between the different boundaries you have to give each boundary in the
mesh a unique number – or attribute value.

A boundary in the model equals the vertices plus the start and end node
along the arc(s) as defined in the Mesh Generator. You therefore have to
specify an attribute for both the arc itself and the start and end nodes of the
arc.

212 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definition Toolbar

Figure 17.2 Arc Property dialog

The first and last node of an arc is defined as the positive direction of rotation
around the model area, i.e. counter clockwise

A node – which by definition is the start and end point of the arc – typically
belongs to two arcs. This implies that you have to pay special attention to the
attribute values you give the start and end nodes.

Depending on how the arcs connect to each other you shall follow on of the
following two rules.

Connection of two open boundaries

In this case you have to ensure that the end node of the arc is given the same
attribute value as the arc itself. This is illustrated below.

Connection of an open and a closed boundary

In this case you have to ensure that the node that connects the open and
closed boundaries is given the attribute value corresponding to the attribute
value of the open boundary. This is irrespective of the node being the first or
last node along the open boundary arc. The scenario is illustrated below.

Powering Water Decisions 213

 Toolbar Functions

Note: During export of a generated mesh, all arc and node attributes at an
outer boundary with a value of 0 are converted to 1. An attribute value of 1
indicates land. You shall therefore always use a value of 2 or higher as attrib-
ute value for an open boundary. Use the same attribute value for boundary
nodes and arcs that shall be exposed to the same boundary conditions.

17.2.3 Polygon properties

You use the Polygon properties dialog to specify the details of the mesh
within the polygon. That is whether a triangular or quadrangular mesh
approach is to be used within the polygon.

You can specify whether the polygon shall

 be included in the mesh generation

 have a triangular mesh
 have a quadrangular mesh

Islands located in the inner part or the model domain shall be defined as pol-
ygons and be excluded from mesh generation.

You can also give the polygon a name for easy identification and you can set
an upper limit for the triangular mesh elements within the polygon.

When selecting the quadrangular mesh option the direction of the elements
must be specified through the start and the end arc. These arcs are chosen
such that the anticipated flow is perpendicular to the arcs.

There are two approaches with respect to the generation of the quadrangular
grid

 Algebraic box method

 transfinite interpolation

The first of these requires that the start and the end arcs each consist of only
two nodes and one line segment. This constraint is also reflected in the avail-

214 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definition Toolbar

able arcs to be chosen. The list only displays the simple two node (no verti-
ces arcs). The transfinite interpolation method does not have such a
constraint.

For both methods the element size must be specified through a maximum
length in the stream wise direction and in the transversal stream direction.

Further it is possible to zoom to the polygon and to control the display set-
tings when the polygon is selected.

Figure 17.3 Polygon properties dialog

Setting up zones with quadrangular mesh elements

One or more regions of the work area may have a predominantly flow direc-
tion e.g. a river course. For these regions it may be advantageous to use a
mesh which is aligned with the flow direction. The latter may be achieved by
the use of the quadrangular mesh option. Using this option you may identify
different zones within which a quadrangular mesh may be applied.

The steps involved in setting up a quadrangular mesh zone are

Powering Water Decisions 215

 Toolbar Functions

1. Construct a polygon using 4 or more arcs. Below the inner polygon is

destined to have a quadrangular mesh whileh the two surrounding poly-
gons are to be populated with triangular elements.

2. The inner polygon is defined using the ‘Insert Polygon’ tool. Simply acti-
vate the tool and click within the polygon.

3. Select the ‘Select Polygons’ tool and click on the defined polygon and
then right click to activate the conetxt sensitive menu. Note that as the
polygon is selected the outline of the polygon is marked and the inner
part is coloured.

4. Select the properties menu item

5. Within the properties dialog the polygon or zone should be given a name
for easy identification say ‘river bed’.

216 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definition Toolbar

6. Select the ‘Apply quadrangular mesh’

7. Within the quadrangular mesh options the start and the end arcs must be
selected. Note that only valid arcs are displayed for selection. A Start and
an end arc cannot be adjacent. Further when using the algebraic boxing
method the begin and end arc must both be single line segment arcs i.e.
no vertices.

8. The maximum element length in the stream wise direction is set (from
start arc to end arc)

9. The maximum element length in the transversal direction is set.

10. You may choose to control the display settings for the polygon if you so
desire

11. Click OK

12. In the main menu select ‘Mesh’ and then ‘Generate Mesh’ and then
finally ‘Generate’. A combined mesh will then appear.

Powering Water Decisions 217

 Toolbar Functions

General guidelines for applying quadrangular mesh elements

When combining multiple quadrangular mesh polygons some guidelines
must be followed

 Multiple quadrangular mesh polygons may only be connected at start or

end arcs

 Polygons should not have vertices giving rise to angles which are greater
than 270 degrees

 When applying the algebraic box method the end and start arcs must
only consist of one line segment each

Note: Once a mesh is generated it is possible to modify individual elements

using the Mesh Editing Toolbar (p. 223), for example merging two triangular
elements to one quadrangular element.

17.2.4 Break line properties

Break lines are polylines which act as boundaries for interpolation. Thus a
point lying on the opposite side of a break line should be disregarded when
carrying out an interpolation using the nearest neighbour or the linear interpo-
lation routine. Two points lie on opposite sides of a break line, if the line seg-
ment joining the points intersect the break line at least once.

A scenario is illustrated below: A shallow area is connected to a deep chan-

nel to serve as an extra reservoir. The bed level in the shallow area is -2
meter to -1 meter, whereas the bed level in the channel is -10m. A few scatter
points are inserted to reflect this.

218 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Boundary Definition Toolbar

Having inserted a break line to divide the two main areas the interpolated
bathymetry clearly shows a shallow area next to a deep channel (left figure
below), if no break line is inserted this is not the case (right figure below).

NOTE: Node points assigned values by the Value from scatter data option will
not consider the presence of the break lines as these are not a part of the
interpolation.

Powering Water Decisions 219

 Toolbar Functions

17.3 Info Toolbar

You use the info toolbar to navigate in the workspace and to measure dis-
tances..

Icon Description

Use this function as a shortcut to the Go To dialog

Use this function to measure distances in the workspace

17.4 Scatter Data Toolbar

You use the scatter data toolbar to add, select, reduce, delete and edit scatter
data.

Note: Changing scatter data using the toolbar functionality will overwrite the
original xyz file.

Icon Description Pointer

Use this function to graphically add scatter data points

Use this function to display the overall properties for scat-

ter data points within a region

Use this function to graphically select and delete scatter

data points

Use this function to graphically select and edit scatter

data points

220 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Scatter Data Toolbar

17.4.1 Graphically adding scatter data

Clicking the Add Scatter Data toolbar function opens a dialog box where you
can specify the Z-value of the added scatter points.

Figure 17.4 Add scatter data dialog for manual insertion of scatter points

You add scatter points by holding down the left mouse button and moving the
mouse in the workspace area. The points are not added to the active scatter
data set – the set used for interpolation – until you have saved the added
scatter data points to an XYZ-file.

Note:
- You can add scatter data points to an existing XYZ-file by specifying the
existing file in the File selection field.
- You can dynamically change the Z-value in the dialog box. This only affects
the points added after the value has been changed.

17.4.2 Graphically selecting scatter data

Clicking the Select Scatter Data toolbar button makes it possible to outline a
region in the workspace. You define the region by clicking at the corner points
of the region.

After you have defined the region you can display the region context menu by
clicking the right mouse button. The context menu gives you the possibility to
display the properties for the outlined region.

Powering Water Decisions 221

 Toolbar Functions

Figure 17.5 Scatter data properties for selected region

The properties comprise:

 The region area and centre point

 The number of scatter points within the region
 The maximum, minimum and mean depth within the region

17.4.3 Deleting scatter data

Clicking the Delete scatter data toolbar button makes it possible to delete
individual points or multiple points. The choice between a singular and multi-
ple selection is done by right clicking and choosing either 'node', 'inside rec-
tangle' or 'inside polygon'. The points being deleted will be removed from the
view and the scatter data files.

17.4.4 Scatter data editing

Clicking the Edit scatter data toolbar button makes it possible to modify the z-
value of a scatter data point. By activating this tool and selecting either a one
or multiple scatter points the user may select to either add a value to the z-
value or to modify the z-value. The Selection is done in the same way as the
deletion tool.

Finally, the editing that has been carried out on to the scatter data will be
saved in the corresponding xyz files when the set-up is saved.

Note: Scatter data editing is not covered by the undo and redo functionality
within the mesh generator.

222 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Prioritization Toolbar

17.5 Prioritization Toolbar

You use the Area prioritization toolbar to define, modify and delete areas for
use in prioritizing scatter values during interpolation.

Icon Description Pointer

Define prioritization area

Move area node

Add node to area

Delete area node

Select area

17.5.1 Prioritization area name

When you have selected an existing prioritization area or are creating a new
prioritization area, a dialog shows the name of the polygon. You may edit the
name.

The names are used for local prioritization of scatter data during interpolation,
see Prioritize Scatter Data (p. 180).

17.6 Mesh Editing Toolbar

You use the mesh editing toolbar to modify the mesh layout and the node val-
ues. After pressing the toolbar icon the pointer enables you to select a node,
a face or an element, respectively, for editing.

Powering Water Decisions 223

 Toolbar Functions

Note: The changes made to the mesh using the mesh editing facilities are not
tracked or saved as a list in the mdf-file. Only the resulting mesh is saved for
further reference.

Icon Description Pointer

Delete mesh node

Move mesh node

Add mesh node within the existing mesh

Add mesh node at boundary of the existing mesh

Collapse element face.

The adjacent elements will automatically be re-trian-
gulated

Collapse element.
The adjacent elements will automatically be re-trian-
gulated

Merge triangular elements into one quadrangular

element

Edit mesh node properties.

Re-interpolate z-values in selected region

Re-triangulate mesh in selected region

Note: The Mesh Editing toolbar is only available when you are in the Mesh
Editing mode.

224 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Editing Toolbar

17.6.1 Delete mesh node

When you delete a mesh node you have to specify how to handle the adja-
cent elements.

You can choose to re-triangular the adjacent elements or to Make land of the
adjacent elements.

Figure 17.6 Retriangulation options when deleting mesh node

In case you specify Re-triangulate the resulting polygon is re-triangulated. An

example is shown in Figure 17.7.

Figure 17.7 Deleting node: Initial and resulting mesh after re-triangulation

Make land
If the resulting polygon is to be defined as land you have to specify the value
of the boundary nodes.

Powering Water Decisions 225

 Toolbar Functions

Figure 17.8 Definition of code value in boundary node

The code value for the boundary nodes will per default be 1 (land) but it can
be larger, thus indicating an internal boundary.

An example of a resulting mesh changed to land is shown in Figure 17.9.

Figure 17.9 Deleting node: Initial and resulting mesh making land

17.6.2 Move mesh node

You can move a mesh node by selecting and dragging it to a new location.
The new location must be within the polygon made up of the elements con-
nected to the node to be moved. Figure 17.10 shows an example.

The z value at the new location is interpolated based on the user default set-
tings for interpolation. The data used as scatter data for the interpolation are
the values at the mesh nodes.

226 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Editing Toolbar

Figure 17.10 Moving node: Initial and resulting mesh

17.6.3 Add mesh node

When you add a mesh node to the existing mesh you have to specify if you
want to re-triangulate adjacent elements.

 If yes, then the area with elements adjacent to the element enclosing the
new mesh node will be re-triangulated

 If no, then only the element enclosing the point will be changed

Figure 17.11 Retriagulation options when adding mesh node

An example of the resulting mesh using each of the two options is shown in
Figure 17.12.

The z value is obtained through interpolation using the user settings. The
data used as scatter data for the interpolation are the values at the mesh
nodes.

The code value of the mesh node is set to zero i.e. an internal node.

Powering Water Decisions 227

 Toolbar Functions

Figure 17.12 Adding node: Initial and resulting mesh

Upper: Re-triangulating adjacent elements
Lower: Triangulation of single element

17.6.4 Add mesh node at boundary

You can add a mesh node to the boundary of the mesh. An example is shown
in Figure 17.13.

The z value of the new mesh node is obtained through interpolation using the
user settings. The data used as scatter data for the interpolation are the val-
ues at the mesh nodes.

228 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Editing Toolbar

Figure 17.13 Adding node to boundary: initial and resulting mesh

17.6.5 Collapse element face

When a face is collapsed the joined elements may be either triangular or rec-
tangular. As shown in the figures below a triangular element will degenerate
into a face element whereas a quadrangular element will degenerate into a
triangular element.

The z value of the new mesh node is obtained through interpolation using the
user settings. The data used as scatter data for the interpolation are the val-
ues at the mesh nodes.

The code value of the mesh node is set to the maximum of the two nodes
being collapsed.

Figure 17.14 Collapsing of mesh face for a triangular element

Powering Water Decisions 229

 Toolbar Functions

Figure 17.15 Collapsing of mesh face for a quadrangular element

17.6.6 Collapse element

When a mesh element (triangular or quadrangular) is collapsed it takes all

nodes in the mesh element and collaps them to the centre point of the ele-
ment (centre of mass) as shown in Figure 17.16.

Note: This procedure may remove up to four mesh elements (five if the col-
lapsed element is quadrangular).

The z value at the new mesh node is obtained through interpolation using the
user settings. The data used as scatter data for the interpolation are the val-
ues at the mesh nodes.

The code value of the mesh node is set to the maximum of the nodes of the
collapsed element.

Figure 17.16 Collapsing mesh element for triangular mesh

230 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Mesh Editing Toolbar

17.6.7 Merge triangular elements

You can create a new quadrangular element by removing the common face
between two triangular elements as shown in Figure 17.17.

Note that element faces can only be removed at the interface between two
triangular elements. No interpolation is needed for the new mesh.

Figure 17.17 Merging two triangular elements into one quadrangular element

17.6.8 Edit mesh node

You can change the properties for the individual mesh nodes. The options
depends on the location of the mesh node.

 Inside the model boundary you can modify the location of the mesh node
by the (x,y) coordinates and the z value.

 At the model boundary can modify the z value and the code value.

Figure 17.18 Editing Mesh node properties

Note: It is possible to select multiple mesh nodes to edit by using the context
sensitive polygon or rectangular selection tool. In this case the x and the y
fields are deactivated.

Powering Water Decisions 231

 Toolbar Functions

17.6.9 Re-interpolate z-values in selected region

You can re-interpolate scatter data onto the mesh in a selected region. Click
the toolbar icon and select a region using the context sensitive polygon or
rectangular selection tool. The mesh nodes lying within the polygon are then
highlighted and the interpolation can be carried out for only the selected
mesh nodes based on the global settings in the interpolation menu.

17.6.10 Re-triangulate mesh in selected region

You can re-triangulate a selected region of the mesh. Click the toolbar icon
and select a region using the context sensitive polygon or rectangular selec-
tion tool. The selected elements and mesh nodes lying within the polygon are
then highlighted and the Mesh generation dialog appears (p. 187). After set-
ting the triangulation parameters the re-triangulation can be carried out for
only the selected area.

232 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 D A TA VI E W E R

Powering Water Decisions 233

234 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
18 Introduction
The Data Viewer provides you an environment for inspecting and analysing
simulation results obtained from one of the MIKE Zero flexible mesh models.
Today MIKE Zero offers the MIKE 21 Flow Model FM, MIKE 3 Flow Model FM
and MIKE 21 Spectral Wave Model FM that calculates based on a flexible
mesh.

With the tool you can visualize the results as 2D contour plots or as 2D vector
field maps, extract values at one or more points and present them in time
series plot, presenting results as vertical slices and inspect the raw values as
numbers in arbitrarily selected regions. The tool provides you numerous func-
tions for navigating and visualizing the data - e.g. zooming in the horizontal
plane, forward and backward spooling in the time dimension and selection
horizontal layers in results from the 3D MIKE 3 flow Model FM.

Figure 18.1 Temperature results for an area covering Øresund, Denmark.

Powering Water Decisions 235

 Introduction

Although the tool is targeting results files from the MIKE Zero FM models, it
provides also some functionality for inspecting and analysing results obtained
with the classic MIKE Zero structured mesh models, e.g. MIKE 21 HD. If you
use the Data Viewer for analysing model results obtained with one of these
models, you have to know, that the Data Viewer interpolate the point values in
order to specify the shade colour of the element.

Typically you use the Data Viewer for one of the following two reasons:

 For analysing model results - perhaps for trying to identify possible

causes for model results or instabilities.

 For preparing model results presentations - e.g. animations of tidal wave

propagation over the model area, time series plot of current speed in
areas of particularly interests.

NOTE: Both the Data Manager and the Data Viewer can be applied to visual-
ize the outline and contents of .mesh and .dfsu files. You may shift the default
editor for .mesh and .dfsu files by modifying the file association:
MIKE Zero->File->Options->User Settings->File Associations

236 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

19 Concepts
Your work with the Data Viewer starts by selecting a simulation results file -
typically a file of type .dfsu (result file from one of the FM models). The Data
Viewer also accepts files of type .dfs2 (i.e. a file with model results from one
of the MIKE Zero structured models) and of type .mesh (a mesh definition
file).

After having selected the file you want to analyse your work with the Data
Viewer revolves around the use of:

 The menu system for defining how and what you want to see from the
result file.

 The toolbars for accessing often used functionality.

 The workspace area context menu - right clicking in the main window -
provides you a shortcut for the most used functionality.

 The workspace area for specifying time series points, vertical profile
routes and node selection for viewing numeric data values.

These elements of the Data Viewer is shown below in Figure 19.1.

Although you can use the Data Viewer to modify the loaded data files, the tool
is - as the name also indicates - mainly a browser type of tool. I.e. you will
typically not change any data values.

 In order for you to get the best out of your work with the Data Viewer, you
have to know a few things about MIKE Zero data files:

 A data file is organized as a collection of time steps and items.

 A time step represents data at specific points in time. A time step in a

data file represents data values at a specific point in time.

 An item represents a specific physical entity - e.g. surface elevation, tem-

perature etc.

 Data files can be categorized as 0-, 1-, 2- and 3-dimensional. The Data
Viewer works only with 2- and 3-dimensional files, i.e. files with data that
is addressed with 2 or 3 spatial coordinates and one time coordinate.

With the Data Viewer you can navigate in the data file by going from time step
to step for visualizing e.g. the progression of a tidal wave or from item to item
for e.g. correlating tidal wave progression with e.g. salt intrusion.

Powering Water Decisions 237

 Concepts

Figure 19.1 Concepts in the Data Viewer

238 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Introduction

20 Getting Started

20.1 Introduction
This chapter guides you through a working session with the Data Viewer.
During the session you will try-out a number of the many features the Data
Viewer provides you for analysing and presenting results obtained from the
MIKE Zero FM models.

All of the exercises in this getting started guide uses a results file obtained
from a 3D simulation of the flow field and transportation of salt and tempera-
ture in Øresund - the sound between Denmark and Sweden. The simulation
were originally made during a study undertaken by DHI for the Danish and
Swedish authorities in order to assess the environmental impact of construc-
tion a link between the two countries. You can read more about this study in
the MIKE Zero Flow Model FM Getting Started guide.

The result file used in this example is located in the default MIKE Zero instal-
lation folder at

.\Examples\MIKE_Zero\DataViewer

The Getting Started example is organized in the following 6 steps:

Step 1 - Visualize salt intrusion in the model area

Step 2 - Viewing the flow field
Step 3 - Making a time series plot of the salinity concentration at two
points
Step 4 - Creating a Vertical profile of the current
Step 5 - Inspecting data values
Step 6 - Making a video animation of salt intrusion

20.2 Step 1 - Visualize salt intrusion in the model area

During this step of the Getting Started example you visualize salt-water intru-
sion from north in the model area.

Please start MIKE Zero, select FileOpenFile. From the presented Select
data file dialog you browse to the 3D_flow.dfsu result file. After having
selected the file, the workspace area of the Data Viewer displays a contour
plot of the first data item in the file extracted at the first time step and top
layer. You should see a drawing similar to Figure 20.1.

Powering Water Decisions 239

 Getting Started

Figure 20.1 Initial drawing

You can see that the first times step in the data file corresponds to the 6. Sep-
tember, 1997 at midnight and that the file contains 13 time steps in total
(counted from 0 to 12) and have 10 layers. You can also see that the first item
is the U velocity, which corresponds to the velocity component in the X-direc-
tion.

Please select Salinity as a data item from the item selection dropdown button
in the toolbar or from the Data menuOptionsContour dialog. Go to time
step 7 (either by using the time step text field in the toolbar or by using the
DataOptionsTime dialog). From the ViewDisplay Settings... dialog
switch to Box Contour. Zoom on the narrow strait at the North end of the area.
You should now see something similar to Figure 20.2.

240 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 1 - Visualize salt intrusion in the model area

Figure 20.2 Salt intrusion at the North end of the Sound

Note: You can move around in the model area at the current selected zoom
level by use of the scrollbars, e.g. by moving the vertical scrollbar downwards
you will also move the viewport in the data.

Please from the View menu switch to Shaded Contour, impose the mesh,
enable a title and a North arrow indicator. Place the North arrow on land area
just below the North open boundary. The drawing should then appear as in
Figure 20.3.

Powering Water Decisions 241

 Getting Started

Figure 20.3 Shaded contours and annotations

Note how much smoother the shading appears.

20.3 Step 2 - Viewing the flow field

This step teaches you to impose a vector field illustrating the current flow in a
model area. Again load the 3D_flow.dfsu result file (see Step 1 in the Getting
Started guide).

Please select Salinity from the item selection dropdown button in the toolbar
and then select Vectors at element centers from the DataOptionsVector
dialog.

In most case time step zero in a results file corresponds to the initial condi-
tions of the simulation. This implies that the current velocity is zero in the
entire model area and correspondingly no vectors will be drawn. Please go to
time step 10 from the time step text button in the Workspace. You should now
be able to see some very small vectors representing - and scaled after - the
current flow velocities.

In order to better see the vectors please increase the vector length scaling.
From the DataOptionsVector options dialog specify User defined scaling
and use 5 as scale factor in both the X- and Y-directions. Figure 20.4 shows
the flow field before and after vector scaling.

242 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 3 - Making a time series plot of the salinity concentration at two points

Figure 20.4 Effect of vector scaling

20.4 Step 3 - Making a time series plot of the salinity concentration

at two points
In this step you will learn how two use the Data Viewer for extracting data val-
ues at user specified points and presenting them in a time series plot.

Please load the 3D_flow.dfsu result file as described in Step 1 of this guide.

You will during this step define two time series location point - one close to
the north boundary and one close to the south boundary - and extract data
values of salinity and present the data values in a time series plot.

Please ensure that the current selected data item is Salinity. If this is not the
case, you can select Salinity as current selection from the dropdown item
selection button in the toolbar. Select the Time Series Location button in the
toolbar, please notice that cursor changes to a time series icon. Click at a
position close to the north boundary and a position at the left part of the south
boundary. You should notice that the workspace is updated with a marker at
the selected point. Double click the left mouse button outside the model area
and the Data Viewer displays the exact location of the point, see Figure 20.5.

Powering Water Decisions 243

 Getting Started

Figure 20.5 Point properties dialog

The dialog in Figure 20.5 lets you:

1. Modify the coordinates of the points and

2. Specify whether you want:
– To keep the point markers in the workspace,
– Remember the locations between invocations of the dialog
– Interpolate data values to the exact location of the defined points or
use the nearest point values.

Please keep the settings as they are and click the OK button. The Data
Viewer then spools through the file and extracts the requested values. The
values will be shown in a time series plot in a window separate from the
works space window. You should see something similar to what is shown in
Figure 20.6.

244 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 4 - Creating a Vertical profile of the current

Figure 20.6 Time series of salinity

20.5 Step 4 - Creating a Vertical profile of the current

In this step you will learn how to view data values in vertical profiles.

Please load the 3D_flow.dfsu result file as described in Step 1 of this guide.

You will during this step define a profile route - ranging from the island of
Amager to the island of Saltholm - and generate a vertical contour plot of the
distribution of current in the profile.

Please ensure that the current selected data item is Current speed. If this is
not the case, you can select Current speed as current selection from the
dropdown item selection button in the toolbar. Select the Selection of Vertical
Profile button in the toolbar and please notice that shape of the cursor
changes to a profile. Click at a position on the island of Amager (the largest
island in the model area and located almost in the middle of the area) and
move the mouse to a position on the island of Saltholm (the island slightly to
the right of Amager) and double-click. This ends the profile route definition
and you will be presented a dialog that shows you the exact coordinates
defining the profile route. You can - optionally - modify the coordinates from
the dialog as well as you can choose to overlay the workspace area with the
profile route. Please accept the settings as they are shown by selecting the
OK button.

The Data Viewer extract values along the profile route and downwards. The
extracted values will be shown in a window separate from the workspace win-
dow as a profile plot. You should end up with visualization similar to the one

Powering Water Decisions 245

 Getting Started

shown in Figure 20.7. Please note that contours in Figure 20.7 are drawn as
shaded contours.

Figure 20.7 Profile plot

Note: You can with the profile plot view the time evolution of the current distri-
bution by time navigating forward and backward in time - use the Navigate
toolbar to either single stepping or playing the data file.

20.6 Step 5 - Inspecting data values

In this step you will learn how to view the exact numerical data values within a
user specified area.

Please load the 3D_flow.dfsu result file as described in Step 1 of this guide.

You will during this step define a polygon in the area between the islands of
Amager and Saltholm (see the previous step for the location of the islands).
The reason for this is to inspect the exact values of the current speed within
the area.

Please ensure that the current selected data item is Current speed. If this is
not the case, you can select Current speed as current selection from the
dropdown item selection button in the toolbar. Then Navigate to time step 22
in the data file and finally do a zoom on the area to be inspected. You should
now see a workspace area similar to the one in Figure 20.8.

246 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 5 - Inspecting data values

Figure 20.8 Strait between the islands of Amager and Saltholm

Select the Position of Node Selection Polygon button in the toolbar and
please notice that shape of the cursor changes to a polygon. Click at a posi-
tion on the top-right corner of Amager and outline an area encompassing the
straits between the two islands. Double-click the left mouse button when you
are satisfied with the outline. The Data Viewer then opens a dialog showing
you the index numbers of the elements located within the polygon, the current
speed at the centre of the elements and the x- and y-coordinates at the cen-
tre point. Depending on your outline the dialog should appear someway simi-
lar to the one presented in Figure 20.9.

It is possible to use this dialog for editing the selected item values, however
for this example the functionality is only used for reviewing the data.

Powering Water Decisions 247

 Getting Started

Figure 20.9 Current speed values

Note: The dialog also lets you specify whether you want the values to be
drawn in the workspace area - here, you can select between having the ele-
ment numbers and/or data values shown. Selecting the Empty Selection
check box empties the current selection and erases any workspace annota-
tion. You may use the Calculator to modify the selected element values.

Please ensure that the Display Element Value is selected and the two check
boxes are de-selected. Then click the OK button. You should then see a
drawing equal to the one shown in Figure 20.8, but with the current speed
values shown on top of the contours. Most likely the numbers are located too
close to each other for you to be able to read the values. Try to zoom closer
to the strait area - you should then see something similar to what is shown in
Figure 20.10.

248 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Step 6 - Making a video animation of salt intrusion

Figure 20.10 Zoom on the Strait between the islands of Amager and Saltholm

Note: Please be aware that drawing data values on top of the workspace
area can take a considerable amount of time.

20.7 Step 6 - Making a video animation of salt intrusion

The last step in the Getting Started guide is to make a video showing the salt
intrusion in the Sound.

Please load the 3D_flow.dfsu result file as described in Step 1 of this guide
and ensure that Salinity is selected as the current data item (if this is not the
case you can use the Item Selection dropdown button in the toolbar to select
the Salinity Item).

Please from the VideoProperties dialog specify the name of the file to hold
the video and specify a frame rate of 10 frames per second, see Figure 20.11.

Figure 20.11 Setting Video generation properties

Powering Water Decisions 249

 Getting Started

Select the OK button and back in the Workspace area make sure that the cur-
rent time step number is 0 (use the time step button in the Navigate toolbar if
this is not the case). Press the Video Forward button in the Navigate toolbar
to initiate the video generation. You will then be given the option to compress
the video output file. The workspace window will be updated during the video
recording.

Note: Please be aware that video generation can take a considerably amount
of time.

A message box, see Figure 20.12, will inform you when the video generation
has ended.

Figure 20.12 Video generation notification

You can distribute video like this one to e.g. your customers. They will be able
to view the video with most modern media players like e.g. Microsoft Media
Player. Figure 20.13 below shows the above-generated video loaded in
Microsoft Media player.

Figure 20.13 Salt Intrusion in Microsoft Media Player

250 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Menu

21 Reference Guide
The Data Viewer provides you an environment for inspecting and analysing
simulation results obtained from one of the MIKE Zero flexible mesh models.

21.1 File Menu

The File Menu provides functionality for opening, closing and saving files,
and for accessing printer related utilities.

21.1.1 File/New Menu

You use the FileNew menu to create a new workspace for viewing and ana-
lysing model results. Selecting this menu provides you with a file selection
box you use to navigate to the result file you want to analyse. You can select
files with the following extensions:

 .dfsu - simulation results from the MIKE Zero FM models.

 .dfs2 - MIKE Zero type 2 data file - typically results from the MIKE Zero
2D simulation modules.
 .mesh - flexible mesh generated by the MIKE Zero Mesh Generator tool.

21.1.2 File/Open Menu

You can use this menu to open a MIKE Zero FM result file (file type .dfsu) for
viewing and analysing model results.

If a .frv file exists with the identical basename this file will be read and
applied. A .frv file contains settings from a previous work session with the
Data Viewer, e.g. a reference to the results file and zoom level, item selec-
tion, vector scaling etc.

21.1.3 File/Save (Save As)

If you save your workfile the Data Viewer settings from the current session
will be saved in a .frv file. This file will contain a reference to the results file
plus various settings like zoom level, item selection, vector scaling etc.

21.2 Edit Menu

Clipboard and object editing.

Undo
Undo latest command.

Powering Water Decisions 251

 Reference Guide

Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies and pastes your selected data through the Windows clipboard.

Copy View/Paste View

Copies and pastes the current view between different instances of Result
Viewer, Data Viewer, the Graphical overview tab in the FM Input Editor, Data
Manager and the Grid Series Editor.

Ctrl+Shift+C/Ctrl+Shift+V can be used as accelerator keys.

21.3 View Menu

The View provides you with functionality for customizing the workspace area
by e.g. overlaying it with geographical information like a longitude/latitude net,
a North arrow and with general annotation. You can e.g. annotate the area
by:

 A data title giving the name of the currently loaded data file
 Changing the used contouring algorithm
 Zoom level
 Etc

21.3.1 Coordinate Overlays

This menu makes it possible to overlay the workspace area with a geograph-
ical net showing the longitudes and latitudes, a map projection grid and an
arrow pointing towards true North.

Map Projection
You can add or remove a map projection net in the display.

You can select which map projection net to overlay. Per default the displayed
map projection net is defined as in the data file.

North Arrow
You can add or remove a north indicator in the display.

You can choose between different types of indicators as well as specify a

given position for the north indicator to be placed in the display.

21.3.2 Display Settings

By default the Data Viewer shows a shaded contour plot of the first item (and
first time step) in the data file. Alternatively other contouring algorithms can
be applied by editing the Contour type.

252 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

View Menu

The plot display can furthermore be defined by Isolines, Miscellaneous set-

tings and Common view properties.

21.3.3 Vectors

This menu toggle between showing or hiding a layer with the calculated flow
velocity, the flow velocity is shown in the form of a vector field. The Data
Viewer will in most cases be able to select the right information from the
result file in order to create the vector field, this is always the case with e.g.
results file from the MIKE Zero FM models.

In case the Data Viewer for some reasons does not have the information nec-
essary for selecting the flow velocity information, you can specify the items in
the result file that contains the flow velocity components. You do this from the
Vectors entry in the Data Viewer dialog, select the DataProperties menu.

21.3.4 Axis Annotation

This enables you to toggle between showing or hiding the workspace axes,
i.e. the coordinate axes.

21.3.5 Value at Cursor

This enables you to toggle between showing or hiding the value of the individ-
ual element.

21.3.6 Zoom in

The Zoom In menu gives access to a rubber band you can use to select a
sub-area to work with. You use the rubber to define the sub-area - with the
band present, you outline the area by pressing the left mouse button and
dragging the mouse. When you release the button, the Data Viewer will zoom
to the specified area.

21.3.7 Zoom to Coordinates

With the Zoom to Coordinates menu you can define the zoom area by speci-
fying the coordinates at the lower left and upper right corner of the area.

21.3.8 Zoom Out

The Zoom Out menu resets the zoom level to the full workspace area.

Powering Water Decisions 253

 Reference Guide

21.3.9 Fixed Aspect Ratio

This menu toggle between drawing in fixed aspect ratio or not. With Fixed
Aspect Ratio enabled the workspace area will be drawn using the same scale
for both x- and y-coordinates. Clearing Fixed Aspect Ratio results in a work-
space area that fills the entire editor window.

Note: It is not possible to enable Fixed Aspect Ratio whenever the ratio
between the two axis is less than 0.02.

21.3.10 Export Graphics

With the Export Graphics menu you can copy the workspace area as an
image to the clipboard or directly save it in a file as a bitmap or Windows
metafile. This is mainly used when preparing presentations or for importing
illustrations in reports.

Save Isoline to Shape file

This feature allows the isolines of the current view to be saved to a shape-file
(alternatively to an xyz-file).
The current palette with the separating values between the different colors
defines the list of isolines that are captured to the specified file.

21.3.11 Font

This menu lets you select the font to use for drawing text in the workspace
area.

21.3.12 Toolbar

The Toolbar menu gives access to a toolbar selection dialog.

Note: you cannot deselect the Data Viewer specific toolbars.

21.3.13 Status bar

The Status bar menu toggles between showing or hiding the MIKE Zero sta-
tus bar.

21.4 Data Menu

You use the data menu for changing the aspect of the data that is visualized.
E.g. you can from the menu select one or more points in the data and have
the Data Viewer to generate a time series plot of the values in the specified
point or points. Or you can use the data menu to select the time step or data
item that shall be visualized in the workspace area.

254 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

21.4.1 Properties

The Properties menu provides you a number of dialogs from where you can
select and specify different aspects of the data to be visualized.

Common view properties

Figure 21.1 Common view properties

This is where you define the overall style of the display area.

Properties like title, display of title, x- and y-axis annotation, display of info
line, properties of geographical and map projection overlay, displayed map
projection and position of attached overlay like the e.g. the color legend can
be controlled.

Position of attached overlays

Controls whether multiple colour legend overlays should be stacked from the
bottom and up or stacked from the top and down.

Line style
You can customize the line style by width and color.

Powering Water Decisions 255

 Reference Guide

Miscellaneous view parameters

Figure 21.2 Miscellaneous view parameters

This checkbox enables delete values in the data to be shown by a white

background colour. This is especially useful when presenting results from
flooding simulations.

Grid Overlay

Figure 21.3 Grid properties

This is where you define the display style of the grid, and which item to dis-
play.

256 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Contour type
You can define the way contours are displayed. The contour is defined by a
primary option that defines the contour type and a secondary option that
depends on the primary option.

You can also select between discrete or continuous coloring of the color
scale.

Primary option
Box Contour
Each grid cell is given a colour according to the value in the cell.

Box Contour with transparency

Each grid cell is given a colour according to the value in the cell.
Secondary Options: No. 1

Shaded Contour
The grid is covered with colours indicating the values in the cells, a smooth
surface is used. The land values will always be displayed in green.
Secondary options: No. 2 or No. 3 or No. 4 + No. 1

No Contour
Used in connection with background overlays. The bathymetry will not be
shown.

Secondary option
1. Transparency
Used in connection with background overlays the value defines the
transparency of the layer.
2. Copy Colours
The colours indicate the values in the cell.
3. Copy Colours with Transparency
The colours indicate the values in the cell, one colour is fully transparent
(usually white).
4. Blend colours
All colours are transparent with a user-defined transparency (secondary
option 2) and one colour is fully transparent (usually white).

You may define contours, isolines and which item of the data file to display.
The Layer no. refers to the layers in 3-dimensional data files.

Isolines
You can customize the display of both isolines and isoline labels.

Powering Water Decisions 257

 Reference Guide

Miscellaneous
You can toggle between showing or hiding a layer with the mesh or boundary
lines in the model area, and customize the line styles used.

You can also toggle between showing or hiding a color legend for the
selected item. The colour legend is drawn to the right of the workspace and
shows the correlation between colours and data values.

For specifying the values in the color legend, goto the Colors tab.

Item/Layers
In case of a 3D dfsu file, you can specify a specific slice to display. There are
two options for the slice type:

 ‘Layer slicing’ enables you to specify a specific layer number.

 ‘Depth slicing’ enables you specify a specific z-level to display. The val-
ues will the be interpolated from the adjacent layers.

Colors

Figure 21.4 Color properties

The color palette specify the colors used for displaying data according to var-
ious levels. You may create a palette and save it for later use.

258 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Vectors

Figure 21.5 Vector properties

This dialog enables you to overlay the workspace area with a vector field
illustrating the flow field within the model area. The Data Viewer uses two
items from the data file in order to draw the flow field. With results files from
all the MIKE Zero FM models the Data Viewer knows the items for use with
vector drawing, with other types of files, however, you might have to specify
the (X,Y) items manually. In such case you can use Custom defined items.

The dialog also lets you specify how to place the vectors and - in case you
select the vectors to be interpolated to a structured mesh - how to distribute
the vectors in the workspace area.

Note: You can also use the View menu to enable/disable vector drawing.

You specify the style of the vectors in the Vector Options dialog.

Powering Water Decisions 259

 Reference Guide

Vector Options

Figure 21.6 Vector Options

This is where you define the display style of the vectors.

You use the options on this dialog to specify the scaling of the vectors illus-
trating the flow field. The default value is one, but you can specify your own
scaling factor.

You can specify a limit on the vector length, and the color and thickness of the
displayed vectors.

You also get the option to draw a reference vector.

260 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Background tiles

Figure 21.7 Background tiles

This is where you can select to display a background derived from a number
of different map themes or satellite images available from the web.

Interpolation type
Choose between bilinear and nearest neighbour. Bilinear gives a nicer and
smoother rendering of especially the texts embedded in the background
image, whereas nearest neighbour might be a few % faster.

Transformation accuracy
Is specified in % of the covered area. The reason why it's given in % is that
covers projection accuracy in both length units like meter and feet, but also in
degrees. The accepted range is from 0.0001% to 1% of the covered area.
Modifying the value will have greater effect the more distorted the projection
is. Specifying a value closer to the max of 1% allows for a faster but less
accurate reprojection of the background images.

21.4.2 Vertical Profile by Coordinates

If the data file you work with includes 3-dimensional data values, you can use
the Vertical Profile by Coordinates dialog to visualize the data values in a ver-
tical plan. The vertical plane is defined by defining a polyline in the horizontal
plane - you define the polyline by entering the x- and y- coordinates oat the
corners of the polyline in the dialog.

Powering Water Decisions 261

 Reference Guide

Figure 21.8 Vertical Profile Definition

After confirming the coordinates by selecting the OK button, the data in the
vertical plane will be visualized in a separate window as a contour plot.
All z-layers are shown as originally defined, i.e. the adjusted thickness of the
lower layer in a sigma-Z level grid is not visualised.

You can enable or disable a graphical representation of the profile route in the
workspace.

Note: You can also specify the polyline by using the Position of vertical profile
toolbar button.

21.4.3 Time series by Coordinates

The Time Series by Coordinates dialog lets you specify one or more points in
the workspace area. The maximum number of points to extract is 100.

The Data Viewer extracts values at each time step in the data file and pre-
sents them in a time series plot.

262 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Figure 21.9 Time Series by Coordinates Specification

You have to be aware that with large data files, it might take some time for the
Data Viewer to extract the values and present them graphically.

You can specify whether the Data Viewer shall remember the Time Series
locations between activation of the dialog and whether the location of the
extracted time series shall be shown in the workspace.

Note: You can also specify the points by using the Position of time-series
toolbar button.

21.4.4 Selected Points

In some situations you might want to know the exact numeric value at one or
more points within the model area or you want to modify the values. You
specify the points by using the Position of node selection polygon toolbar but-
ton to select an area that includes one or more points at which you want to
know or edit the data values. Alternatively you can select all points by using
the ‘Select All...’ property in the Data drop-down menu. This will open a new
dialog with the selected points. An example is shown in Figure 21.10.

Powering Water Decisions 263

 Reference Guide

Figure 21.10 Selected Points Specification

The data values will both be shown in the dialog and - optionally - in the
workspace area In case you prefer to view the numbers in the workspace
area, you will most often have to zoom very close to the area with the
selected points.

You can also select to see the element numbers in the workspace area by
selecting the Display Element No. check box. To remove data values from the
workspace area, you re-select this dialog and select the Empty selection
check box.

Calculator
The calculator can be used to modify the selected values. This can be done
in terms of a simple value or as an expression, as shown in Figure 21.10.

You need to enter the value or expression and click the Calculate button for
the values to change and need to save the file to keep the changes.

Table 21.1 gives an overview of the functions and lists the function names,
the number of arguments and a brief description.

Table 21.1 Overview of functions in calculator

Name Argc. Explanation

sin 1 sine function

cos 1 cosine function

tan 1 tangens function

264 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Menu

Table 21.1 Overview of functions in calculator

Name Argc. Explanation

asin 1 arcus sine function

acos 1 arcus cosine function

atan 1 arcus tangens function

sinh 1 hyperbolic sine function

cosh 1 hyperbolic cosine function

tanh 1 hyperbolic tangens function

asinh 1 hyperbolic arcus sine function

acosh 1 hyperbolic arcus cosine function

atanh 1 hyperbolic arcus tangens function

log2 1 logarithm to the base 2

log10 1 logarithm to the base 10

log 1 logarithm to the base 10

ln 1 logarithm to the base e (2.71828...)

exp 1 e raised to the power of x

sqrt 1 square root of a value

sign 1 sign function -1 if x<0; 1 if x>0

rint 1 round to nearest number

abs 1 absolute value

max 2 maximum value (returns the bigger value)

min 2 minimum value (returns the minor value)

Table 21.2 lists the default operators supported.

Table 21.2 Overview of operators in calculator

Operator Meaning

= assignment*

+ addition

- subtraction

* multiplication

Powering Water Decisions 265

 Reference Guide

Table 21.2 Overview of operators in calculator

Operator Meaning

/ division

^ raise x to power of y

Table 21.3 contains some examples of expressions.

Table 21.3 Examples of expressions

Expression Description

Bathymetry + 2 Adds 2 to the Bathymetry item value

min(Thickness, 0.2) Ensure Thickness item value is maximal 0.2

First steps in calculating grain size from depth:

(a) -0.001*Still water depth+0.3 a: Calculate d50 from Still water depth item value
Save file.
(b) max(Still water depth, 0.06) b: Ensure d50 is minimum 0.06
(To create a grain size map save the file and
open it using the Data Utility to modify the item
description, item type and item unit to match the
calculated values)

21.4.5 Item selection Filters

You have the option to filter the objects (nodes or elements) before you use
the Node selection polygon area to select values. Usually no filters are active
so all elements can be selected. However, if you select the item 'Code values'
in a mesh file the default setting is to select only nodes with code values > 0.

For each item you can activate or deactivate the filter entirely, and/or specify
the filter settings by an operator and a value.

The default filter settings for a mesh file is shown in Figure 21.11.

266 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Video Menu

Figure 21.11 Item selection filters for mesh file, default settings

21.4.6 Add and remove layers

This menu lets you import image files and use them as background in the
workspace area. You have to specify the path of the images and the position
of the images relative to the workspace area. The latter is defined by specify-
ing the coordinates to the image origin (lower left corner) and the extent of the
image in meters or degrees.

Note: You specify the image origin and extent by clicking the Edit button in
the Image Manager dialog. In the Overlay Manager dialog you can specify
which layer to display and the display order.

21.5 Video Menu

You can use the video menu to set options for generation an animated video
of the data.

21.5.1 Properties

This dialog lets you specify the filename of the video output.

Figure 21.12 Video Properties

The video file will be generated as an AVI file. You can use e.g. Microsoft
Media Player to play the file. From the dialog you can also specify the frame
rate of the video, i.e. the speed with which the file shall be played.

Powering Water Decisions 267

 Reference Guide

Note: The generation of the video is not initiated from this dialog. You will
have to use either the Video forward or Video reverse toolbar buttons to
actual generate the video. You shall be aware that generation of a video can
take a considerable amount of time.

21.6 Colors Menu

You use the Colors menu to specify how to generate the colour legend and to
define a colour palette for the contour drawing.

21.6.1 Auto Scale Type

The Auto Scale Type menu lets you select between three different ways to
generate the colour legend:

 Current Zoom - this option generates the colour legend based on the
minimum and maximum data values from the data at the current time
step and within the current zoom level (the area you have zoomed to).

 Current Layer - this option generates the colour legend based on the
minimum and maximum data values from the data at the current time
step and current vertical layer, i.e. at the same Z (or sigma) coordinate.

 All Data - this option uses the minimum and maximum values from all
time steps and all layers when generating the colour legend.

21.6.2 New Palette

This menu lets you define a custom palette. The palette is used for selecting
the specific colours representing data value ranges.

21.6.3 Save Current Palette

This menu lets you save a custom defined palette.

21.6.4 Edit Current Palette

This menu lets you edit a custom defined palette.

21.6.5 Open Palette

This menu lets you open and read a previous defined palette.

268 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Time series context menu

21.7 Time series context menu

You can use the time series context menu (right-click in the time series win-
dow) to change zoom level of the time series plot, to save the graphics as a
bitmap or a metafile and to save the extended data value as a dfs0 file.

21.7.1 Select Item for Export

You use this dialog to select the items, i.e. values from specific points, you
want to save in the dfs0 file.

Powering Water Decisions 269

 Reference Guide

270 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Zoom Functions

22 Toolbar Functions
The following describes the main editing functions that are available to you
from the toolbar.

22.1 Zoom Functions

Figure 22.1 Zoom functions toolbar

You can Zoom-in, Zoom-out and go to Previous-zoom and Next-zoom. You

can recall all available previous and next zooms. If the buttons are grayed-out
there are no previous or next zooms available.

These functions are also available from the workspace context menu (i.e.
right-clicking in the workspace area).

22.2 Data Functions

Figure 22.2 Data functions toolbar

You use the data functions to:

 Select points for time series generation

 Select position for visualizing the data values in a vertical profile
 Select position of node selection polygon for inspecting the numeric data
values.

Table 22.1 Icon Description for Data functions toolbar

Icon Description

Use this function to deselect a previous selected

function.

Use this function to select points for time series

generation.

Powering Water Decisions 271

 Toolbar Functions

Table 22.1 Icon Description for Data functions toolbar

Icon Description

Use this function to specify a polyline for vertical

profile generation.

Use this function to select a polygon for inspection of

numeric data values.
See also section on Item selection Filters (page 266)

22.3 Navigation Functions

Figure 22.3 Navigation toolbar

You use the navigation functions to navigate in the data file. You can:

 Select the data item to visualize

 Select the horizontal layer to visualize.
Note: The MIKE Zero FM models all work with Sigma coordinates in the
vertical dimension. This implies that the distance between layers meas-
ured in physical units (e.g. meters) is not constant.
 Select the time step in the data file to visualize.
 Generate a video from the data file.

Table 22.2 Icon Description for Navigation functions toolbar

Icon Description

Use this function to select the item from the data file to
visualize.

Use this function to select the layer just above the cur-
rent layer for visualization.

Use this function to select the layer just below the cur-
rent layer for visualization.

Use this function to toggle between layer selection

based on sigma value or z-coordinate.

Use this function to select the layer from which data

shall be visualized. If Sigma-based selection is enabled
you specify a layer number otherwise you specify the z-
coordinate.

272 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Navigation Functions

Table 22.2 Icon Description for Navigation functions toolbar

Icon Description

Use this function to visualize the data from the first time
step in the data file.

Use this function to visualize the data from the time step
just before current time step.

Use this function to generate a video file by automati-

cally going backward in the data file.
Note: You specify the name of the vide file from the
VideoProperties menu

Use this function to automatically update the visualiza-

tion by going backward one time step in the data file. No
video file is generated.

Use this function to stop video generation or automati-

cally playing the data file.
Note: It is always possible to stop an animation by
pressing the <esc> key.

Use this function to automatically update the visualiza-

tion by going forward one time step in the data file. No
video file is generated.

Use this function to generate a video file by automati-

cally going forward in the data file.
Note: You specify the name of the vide file from the
VideoProperties menu

Use this function to visualize the data from the time step
just after current time step.

Use this function to visualize the data from the last time
step in the data file.

Use this function to select the time step number in the

data file from where the data shall be visualized.

Powering Water Decisions 273

 Toolbar Functions

274 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 D A TA M A N A G E R

Powering Water Decisions 275

276 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Operation and Navigation

23 Data Manager
The Data Manager is a utility for managing (create, edit, copy, etc.) Dfs data
files associated with the DHI Software product series.

Data Manager supports the flexible mesh (FM) data files: 2D and 3D .dfsu
files, .mesh files and to some degree 2D and 3D grid files (dfs2 and dfs3
files).

Note: The Data Manager cannot work with Decoupled Flux files.

The Data Manager can be accessed by right-clicking the file and choosing
the option ‘Open with’ Data Manager if the Data Manager has not been asso-
ciated as a default editor for the file.

Note that the Data Manager is designed to update files. Do take a backup of
important simulation files, before loading it into the Data Manager. When
changes to a file are saved to disc, and the Data Manager closed down, there
is no undoing of changes.

23.1 Operation and Navigation

You operate the Data Manager from the main menu, the tool bar icons, or by
right-clicking on the graphical view.

By pressing and holding the shift button and then pressing and holding the
left mouse button, you can pan/move the view. By pressing and holding the
shift button and role the mouse wheel, the view will zoom in/out.

To the right of the graphical view, there is a table of "Element id" and "Value".
You can mark individual element values by using shift/Ctrl and left mouse but-
ton, or you can mark all values by clicking the "Value" header. These values
can be copy-pasted into other applications (text editors, Excel etc.). Similarly,
data can be copy-pasted back into the table from text editors, Excel or others.

Right clicking in the graphical view, you get the context menu, see
Figure 23.1. The context menu contains options to zoom, pan, view mesh
and other visual options, herein Selection and Cropping of data.
Unselecting "Shaded contours" will show box contours instead.

Powering Water Decisions 277

 Data Manager

Figure 23.1 Context menu

23.1.1 Selection

To select/highlight certain elements, right click the graphical view, choose

"Select area". Then by repeatedly left clicking the mouse in the graphical
view, you select a polygon. By double clicking, the polygon selection ends,
and all elements having centre within the polygon will be selected/highlighted.
To remove selection/highlighting, right click and choose "clear selection" from
the context menu.

23.1.2 Cropping

Having selected one or several areas, you can crop the data in two ways:

 Crop to selection
Here you keep the data that are selected
 Cut out selection
Here you keep the data that are not selected

IMPORTANT: The Data Manager is designed to update files. When cropping

or cutting data there will be given no option to save the result in a new file,
thus keeping the original file untouched. Do take a backup of important simu-
lation files, before loading it into the Data Manager.

23.2 File
You may create, open and save files from the File drop-down menu.

Note: Any modifications you have made to your file after opening or creation
are only saved after you have selected ‘Save’ or ‘Save As’ from the File
menu. However, when using Cut/Crop the modifications are saved immedi-
ately.

278 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File

23.2.1 New file

Creating a new data file requires specification of the spatial properties of the
mesh, the time axis and the item(s). Thus a wizard of three steps must be fol-
lowed to create a new file.

Note: You have to save the new file by a filename before you can continue to
edit the data values in the file.
The new file will have one time step only.

Spatial Information
First you define the spatial properties of the file by selecting a file to import
the mesh from.

This can be a mesh file generated by the Mesh Generator or an existing dfsu-
file. If the selected file is a 3D dfsu file, the layers will be imported, but not
editable and constant in time, corresponding to the initial time step in the 3D
file.

Figure 23.2 New file wizard page 1 - define spatial grid

Powering Water Decisions 279

 Data Manager

Time axis information

Then you specify the time axis type. You have five options:

 Undefined
 Equidistant - no explicit start time
 Non-equidistant - no explicit start time
 Equidistant - explicit start time
 Non-equidistant - explicit start time

If selecting an equidistant axis, you have to specify the time step and time
step unit. If selecting an explicit start time you have to define the date and
time of the first time step. You also need to specify the number of time steps.

Figure 23.3 New file wizard page 2 - define time axis

Items
Finally you define the items in the file.

For each item, you must specify its name, type and unit. You may add, edit
and delete item information before you save the file by pressing `Finish'.
When `Finish´ has been pressed, it is no longer possible to add more items.

280 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Edit

Figure 23.4 New file dialog 3 - define item(s)

23.2.2 Open file

The default editor/viewer for dfsu data files can be set to either the Data
Viewer or the Data Manager via the User Settings in the MIKE Zero shell.

If the dfsu file is contained in a MIKE Zero project, you can open an existing
file in the Data Manager, even if the default editor is set to the Data Viewer, by
right-clicking the file in Project Explorer and choose the option ‘Open with...’
Data Manager. The data are then immediately presented in the Data Man-
ager dialog where data can be viewed and edited both in a graphical and in a
tabular view.

23.3 Edit

23.3.1 Clipboard and object editing

Undo
Undo latest command.

Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies and pastes your selected data through the Windows clipboard.

Powering Water Decisions 281

 Data Manager

Copy/Paste View
Copies and pastes the current view between different instances of Result
Viewer, Data Viewer, the Graphical overview tab in the FM Input Editor, Data
Manager and the Grid Series Editor.

Ctrl+Shift+C/Ctrl+Shift+V can be used as accelerator keys.

23.3.2 Calculator

You access the Calculator from Edit on the main menu.

The Calculator can be used to assign/edit values of the current dataset. It can
edit the currently selected item of the dataset. The assignment can be done in
terms of a simple value or as an advanced expression. You can decide to
assign to

 All values in the dataset or a user defined subset.

 The currently selected time step or all time steps.

The user defined subset must be selected in the Data Manager before enter-
ing the Calculator.

Note: When working on large datasets, significant increase of computational

speed can be gained by using the foreach special function when the expres-
sion only contains one item, see Special Functions (p. 286).

282 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Edit

Figure 23.5 Calculator dialog

Variables
The list shows variables that can be used in an expression. Default is listed
the CurrItem, the currently selected item of the dataset being edited.

You can add more items from the same file, and items from other files. The
Calculator automatically handles a number of issues.

Adding items from the same file

 Items need not have the same units.
The Calculator automatically converts between units of same type, i.e.,
you may add different units of length as meters and feet, and the result
will be as expected.

Note: The resulting Calculator-expression must have the same unit type as
the current item, unless the function void() is used.

Adding items from another file

 The files need not to be based on the same mesh. Necessary interpola-
tion is performed in the added items, when the meshes do no match.
Note that even very small differences will imply interpolation. See also
Calculation mode (p. 284).

Powering Water Decisions 283

 Data Manager

 The files need not have the same temporal definition. Necessary interpo-
lation in time is performed in the added items, when the time steps do no
match.

 The files need not cover the same geographical area. The full expression
is only applied in the intersecting area. In areas not covered by the
added items, undefined or zero values will be used instead.

 The coordinate system projections need not to match. All coordinates

are transformed into the system of the current file.

IMPORTANT: In case of 3-dimensional files the calculator expression consid-

ers the vertical position of the cell as well.
If the files are exactly the same in the vertical, as well as being the same hori-
zontal mesh, the mesh values are used directly in the expression. However, if
the mesh resolution in the two files differ, either horizontal or vertical, the var-
iables applied will be based on the centre cell value for the individual mesh
elements. This is found by interpolation considering the values in the adjacent
layers and elements. See also Calculation mode (p. 284).
In case of mesh calculations (not dfsu) the position of the node points in the
second file are not considered in the interpolation, only the numbers.

Output Options
Time step selection
The expression can be applied to time steps in the following ways:

 Apply to only selected time step of current item.

 Apply to all time steps of current item.

In the special case the current item is replaced by the added item, e.g.
CurrItem = Var3, and the time definition of the added item goes beyond the
final time of the current item, time steps will be added to the current item and
the file, thereby increasing the number of time steps in the current file.

Area selection
If a number of elements are selected in the DataManager before entering the
Calculator, you can specify whether the expression is applied to the selected
elements, or all elements in the current file. Default is "only selected area" if
some area is selected, and "all elements" if no area is selected.

When operating on a variable, the function or operator will be applied to all

values of the variable unless otherwise stated.

You may limit the data for editing by defining certain time steps and/or
selected area.

Calculation mode
You have the option to force the calculations to be carried out in interpolate
mode instead of using discrete values values as per default. This is especially

284 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Edit

useful when you perform complex computations and the meshes are differ-
ent.

Expression
The Calculator allows you to compose your own expressions that can be
used to assign or modify values of the current item in the data set. All opera-
tors and functions can operate on either constants or variables.

All operators and functions will be applied to elements of the current item indi-
vidually. This means that all/selected values of the current item will be
updated, but the spatial description will remain unchanged.

The usual Mathematical Functions and Operators can be used, and works in
the traditional manner. Furthermore, some Special Functions are defined.

Units are handled in the expression. If one item of unit [m/s] is multiplied with
an item of type [s], the resulting unit is [m]. A variable with unit [m/s] can not
be added to a variable of unit [m].

Note: The entire expression must return the same unit as the current item. To
circumvent mismatching units, either the convert() or the void() function must
be used.

Mathematical Functions
Below you will find a table with a list of the mathematical functions you can
choose between and which result they return.

Table 23.1 List of functions

Function Evaluation

abs(x) The absolute value of x

sin(x) The sine of x

Note: x is given in radians

cos(x) The cosine of x

Note: x is given in radians

tan(x) The tangent of x

Note: x is given in radians

sinh(x) The hyperbolic sine of x

cosh(x) The hyperbolic cosine of x

tanh(x) The hyperbolic tangent of x

Powering Water Decisions 285

 Data Manager

Table 23.1 List of functions

Function Evaluation

ceil(x) Smallest integer value greater than x

floor(x) Largest integer value less than x

exp(x) Exponential value of x

log(x) Natural logarithm of x

log10(x) The base-10 logarithm of x

sqrt(x) The square root of x

max(x,y) maximum value (returns the bigger value of x or y)

Note:
x and y must be scalars, they cannot be items.
Use the foreach() function to apply on items:
foreach(it in CurrItem, max(it, 0.6))

min(x,y) minimum value (returns the minor value of x or y)

Note:
x and y must be scalars, they cannot be items.
Use the foreach() function to apply on items:
foreach(it in CurrItem, min(it, 0.6))

Special Functions
A number of special functions are available in the Calculator:

undefined()
E.g. undefined(arg).

Returns true/false indicating the state of arg.

Does not check each value in a variable. This is because the variable itself
can be flagged as undefined.
See the foreach(<it> in <variable>, expression) construct for explicit value
iteration.

convert()
E.g. convert(value, eumUnit)

Returns a copy of <value> converted to the requested eumUnit.

if()
E.g. if (test_expression, then_expression, else_expression)

Evaluates <test_expression> as true/false, and then executes either <then_-

expression> or <else_expression>.

286 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Edit

foreach()
E.g. foreach(<iteratorname> in <var>, expression)

Defines <iteratorname> as an iterator variable for the variable <var>. This

iterator can then be used in <expression> as <iteratorname>.
Eg. foreach(it in Var1, it+5), which will add 5 to all values in Var1.

In all cases where an expression is to be applied to all values in a variable,

the foreach operator will be much faster than the corresponding simple
expression.
Eg. foreach(it in Var1, it+5) will execute much faster than the simple (but
equivalent) expression Var1+5.

When performing a calculation on all values in a variable, but disregarding

undefined values it is necessary to use the foreach operator.
Eg. foreach( it in Var1, if (undefined(it), it, it+5) ), will add 5 to all values in
Var1 that are not undefined.

When performing a max/min calculation it is necessary to use the foreach

operator, e.g. foreach(it in Var2, max(it,0.7)).

void()
E.g. void(value)

Returns a copy of <value> without any unit attached.

Operators
Besides the normal operators such as plus, minus, multiply and divide you
may use delimiters and relation operators as given below.

Table 23.2 List of operators

Operator example Evaluation

v1 + v2 Ordinary binary operators

v1 - v2
v1 * v2
v1 / v2

v1^ pow Power operator.

Eg. v1^pow raises v1 to the power of pow

Powering Water Decisions 287

 Data Manager

Table 23.2 List of operators

Operator example Evaluation

v1 == v2 Ordinary binary comparison operators

v1 < v2
v1 > v2
v1 <= v2
v1 >= v2
v1 <> v2 - the ‘not equal’ operator <> can also be
specified as !=

- v1 Unary minus operator

() Parenthesis can be used for explicit expression grouping

23.3.3 Interpolate

This feature interpolates a given item spatially. The interpolation will replace
originally undefined or delete values with interpolated values.

23.3.4 Mark and restore

Mark and restore provides a kind of version control and can be used to undo
changes made to a dataset.

When modifying a dataset, you may want to mark the current version, to be
able to recognize it at a later time. You can continue editing the file, make as
many marks as necessary. If you at some point find out that a previous ver-
sion of the dataset is better, you can restore the data from that version.

When you restore a previous version, all future marks/versions are deleted.

Every time a calculator expression is executed, a mark is automatically cre-

ated.

23.4 View
You may select which item, time step and layer to view and edit from the View
drop-down menu.

23.4.1 Items

You select the item to view by choosing between the available data items in
the dataset.

From this dialog you can also modify an item name, and convert the data val-
ues in the file to another data unit.

288 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tools

Figure 23.6 Select item dialog

23.4.2 Add/Remove images

It is possible to add images to the graphical display. The order of the dis-
played layers can be defined in the overlay manager.

23.5 Tools

23.5.1 Statistics

This tool calculates the statistics of the selected item in the dataset.

The output will be a dataset file with only one time step, containing three
items:

1. Statistical minimum
2. Statistical maximum
3. Statistical mean

Powering Water Decisions 289

 Data Manager

23.5.2 Extraction

Figure 23.7 Data Extraction utility

In the Data Extraction tool you can extract data from a dfsu file.

The possible dimension and definition of the output is dependent on the

dimension of the input dfsu file.

You may extract data in three dimensions:

 Point
 Column (for 3D data files only)
 Profile

Figure 23.8 Illustration of output types when extracting data from dfsu files
Red: 2D dfsu file, Green: 3D dfsu file

290 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Tools

Point
The output from extracting data in a point is a dfs0 file.

You may define the location in two ways:

 Coordinates
Here you define the xy(z) coordinates of the extraction point directly.
 Digitize from graphical view
Here you mark the position of the point on the graphical view.
You define the z-coordinate of the extractio point directly.

Column
The output from extracting data in a column is a dfsu file. The dfsu file con-
tains the values from the layers in the vertical, defining element number 1 as
the bottom layer, and increasing in number towards the water surface.

You may define the location in two ways:

 Coordinates
Here you define the xy coordinates of the extraction point directly

 Digitize from graphical view

Here you mark the position of the point on the graphical view

Note: this option only works for 3D data files.

Profile
The output from extracting a profile depends on the dimension of the input
dfsu file. In case the file is a 2D file, the output is a dfs1 file showing the val-
ues along a line. In case the file is a 3D file, the output is a dfsu file showing
the values in the vertical along a line. You may define the location in two
ways:

 Digitize from the graphical view

Here you mark the position of the line on the graphical view

 Load from .xyz file

Here you specify the name of a .xyz file (z-value is not used).

An additional option is to interpolate the profile line to follow the nearest seg-
ment list, i.e. a line through the node values as displayed in Figure 23.9.

Powering Water Decisions 291

 Data Manager

Figure 23.9 Extraction of data along profile line from (0,50) to (1000,50)
Upper: element mesh
Middle: default extraction line
Lower: extraction line when including nearest segment list

23.5.3 Export to xyz

Figure 23.10 Export element values to xyz file

This tool export element values from the file to ascii file(s) with extension xyz.

For each selected item and time step a separate file is generated. The indi-
vidual files are named by the item description and time value, e.g. ‘Surface
elevation_01-01-2004_01-20-00.xyz’ for the item ‘Surface elevation’ at the
time step ‘01-01-2004 01:20:00’.

A generated output xyz file contains four columns:

1. x-coordinate
2. y-coordinate
3. z-coordinate (in case of 2D files this is the bathymetry value)

292 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Examples

4. element value

23.6 Examples
The following describe some examples of use of the Data Manager.

23.6.1 Comparing simulation results

If you have several simulations of the same area, the Data Manager can com-
pare the results.

Assume we want to compare one item as, e.g., surface elevation from the two
files: data1.dfsu and data2.dfsu. There are two ways of accomplishing this: A
fast procedure and a "reusable" one.

The fast procedure can be applied, when you want to see the difference here
and now, but you do not need to save the difference to a file. The reusable
procedure will save the difference to a new file.

The fast procedure

1. Load data1.dfsu in the Data Manager.
2. Select the item and time step that you wish to compare.
3. Start the Calculator.
4. Add the corresponding item from data2.dfsu as a new variable.
5. In expression, type: CurrItem-Var2
6. We need to specify whether we want to compare all time steps, or just
the current one. Then press Calculate.

Now the current item will be the difference between the two.

Note: Do not press save, since the current item will be overwritten with the
newly calculated data, and the original data in data1.dfsu will be lost.

The reusable procedure

This is the procedure when you want to save the result in a third file.

1. From the menu, select "file", "new", "file" and find the Data Manager. This
will start the "New file wizard".
2. Select "import 2D or 3D dfsu file", and choose either data1.dfsu or
data2.dfsu. This will be the mesh that the comparison will be made on.
Click "next"
3. Select an equidistant time axis - no explicit start time. Specify a time step
corresponding to either of the data1.dfsu, data2.dfsu files.

Powering Water Decisions 293

 Data Manager

4. Add a new item corresponding to the item you wish to compare, e.g., sur-
face elevation. Specify type and unit. If you wish to compare more than
one item, you can add more items here. Click "finish", and you will have
the skeleton of a new file defined.
5. Start the Calculator. Add two variables, as Var3 select data1.dfsu and rel-
evant item, and as Var4 select data2.dfsu and relevant item. Now enter
Var3-Var4 in expression. Press Calculate.

The difference is calculated. You can now save the file.

Note: The two data files need not to be based on the same mesh, or the
same projection. See Variables in Calculator for reference.

IMPORTANT: The result will in general not be exactly the same when com-
paring data1.dfsu with data2.dfsu as opposed to comparing data2.dfsu with
data1.dfsu. This is the case if the meshes in the two files differ. The result will
depend on the mesh used when performing the actual difference, due to the
application of interpolation when meshes differ.

23.6.2 Creating initial conditions

Now we shall show how to make a new file containing initial conditions for a
new simulation. In this example we will generate a grain size map where the
mean grain size, d50, is defined based on the water depth, D, according to the
formula:

d50 = -0.001 . D 2 + 0.3

or

d50 = max(-0.001 . D 2 + 0.3, 0.06)

In the latter case, we set a minimum grain size of 0.06.

We assume that we already have a data.dfsu 2D file containing the still water
depth.

1. From the menu, select "file", "new", "file" and find the Data Manager. This
will start the "New file wizard".
2. Select "import 2D or 3D dfsu file", and choose data.dfsu. Click "next"
3. Select an equidistant time axis - no explicit start time.
4. Add a new item corresponding to the item you wish to use as initial con-
dition, in this case a type Grain Diameter with unit mm. Click "finish", and
you will have the skeleton of a new file defined.
5. Start the Calculator. Add one variable; select data1.dfsu and the still
water depth item. This will be represented by a new variable Var3.

294 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Examples

6. Now enter one of the formulas in expression:

Current item = void(-0.001*Var3*Var2+0.3)

or
Current item = foreach(it in Var3, void(max(-0.001*it^2+0.3, 0.06)))

7. Press Calculate and Click “Save” to save the file

23.6.3 Replacing certain values with delete value

It may be feasible to eliminate all zero-values when evaluating difference

maps or eliminate all values above a certain level to focus on the remaining
data.

Assume we have a difference map where all zero-values is to be replaced by

a delete value, e.g. 1.e-35.

1. Load the dfsu file into the Data Manager

2. Select the item you wish to modify.
3. Start the Calculator.
4. In expression, type:

if(CurrItem<>0,CurrItem,1*10^(-35))
or
if(CurrItem!=0,CurrItem,1*10^(-35))

Note: CurrItem is not valid in the <else_expression>.

5. We need to specify whether we want to modify all time steps, or just the
current one.
6. Press Calculate and Click “Save” to save the file

Powering Water Decisions 295

 Data Manager

296 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 D A TA E X T R A C T I O N F M

Powering Water Decisions 297

298 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Input

24 Data Extraction FM
The Data Extraction FM is a tool for extraction of data from 2D and 3D
unstructured data files (dfsu), e.g. result files from MIKE 21 & MIKE 3 Flow
Model FM and MIKE 21 Spectral Waves FM.

The output dialogs is similar to the outputs dialogs in the setup editors of
MIKE 21 & MIKE 3 Flow Model FM and MIKE 21 Spectral Waves FM and has
a subset of the functionality of these. The specification of point, line and
area/volume series in the Data Extraction FM tool is identical to the specifica-
tion in the setup editors.

Note: This tool doesn’t work for Spectral Parameter files varying in space
(from MIKE 21 SW) or for Decoupled Flux files (from MIKE 21 & MIKE 3 Flow
Model FM).

24.1 Input
Select name and location of the input file, which must be a 2D or 3D unstruc-
tured data file (dfsu).

When a file is selected a number of file information is displayed on the Input

dialog.

24.2 Output
In the main Outputs dialog you can add a new output file by clicking on the
"New output" button. By selecting a file in the Output list and clicking on the
"Delete output" you can remove this file. For each output file you can specify
the name (title) of the file and whether the output file should be included or
not. The specification of the individual output files is made subsequently. You
can go to the dialog for specification by clicking on the "Go to .." button.
Finally, you can view the results using the relevant MIKE Zero viewing/editing
tool by clicking on the "View" button during and after the extraction.

24.2.1 Geographical view

This dialog shows the geographical position of the output data.

24.2.2 Output specification

For each selected output file the field type, the output format, the output file
(name and location) and the time step must be specified. Depending on the
output format the geographical location/extend of the output data must also
be specified.

Powering Water Decisions 299

 Data Extraction FM

Field type
For a 2D unstructured data file the default field type is 2D (horizontal).
In case the 2D data file contains the necessary items to calculate the flow dis-
charge, it is also possible to select field type Discharge.

For a 3D unstructured data file only field type 3D is currently available.

Note: The flow discharge can be calculated if one of the following item com-
binations is contained in the input data file:

 (P flux, Q flux)
 (Surface elevation, U velocity, V velocity)
 (Total water depth, U velocity, V velocity)

Output format
The possible choice of output format depends on the field type.

For field type 2D the following formats can be selected

 Point series. Selected field data in geographical defined points.

 Lines series. Selected field data along geographical defined lines.
 Area series. Selected field data in geographical defined areas.

For field type 3D the following formats can be selected

 Point series. Selected field data in geographical defined points.

 Lines series. Selected field data along geographical defined lines.
 Horizontal plane series. Selected field data in geographical defined hori-
zontal plane.
 Vertical plane series. Selected field data along geographical defined ver-
tical plane.
 Volume series. Selected field data in geographical defined areas and
vertical layers.

For field type Discharge the output format is automatically selected as Cross
section.

Data type
You must specify the data type. You can select discrete values or interpolated
values. For point series, area series, horizontal plane series, vertical plane
series and volume series both options are available. For line series only inter-
polated values is available. See also Table 24.1.

300 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Output

If "discrete values" is selected for the data type for point series, area series,
vertical plane series and volume series, the values written in the data file are
the cell-averaged values. For horizontal plane series this is also the case if
"Layer number" or "Layer number above the bed" is selected for the vertical
type. For the four remaining options (see Horizontal plane series), a linear
interpolation in the vertical direction is applied to calculate the values at the
specified z-level.

If "interpolated values" is selected for the data type, the values written in the
data file are determined by 2nd order interpolation. The element in which the
point is located is determined and the point value is obtained by linear inter-
polation using the vertex (node) values for the actual element. The vertex val-
ues are calculated from on the cell-averaged values using the pseudo-
Laplacian procedure proposed by Holmes and Connell (1989).

Note, that all adjacent elements, including dry elements, are considered in
the interpolation calculation.

Output file
A name and location of the output file must be specified along with the file
type. The file type depends on the Output format and the Data type as shown
in Table 24.1.

Vectors components and tensors components in a 2D dfsu file and horizontal

vector components in a 3D dfsu file are given in the projection coordinate sys-
tem. In a dfs2 file and a dfs3 file the vector and tensor components are given
in the local coordinate system.

Table 24.1 List of file types for the output files

Output format Data type File type

Point series Discrete values dfs0

Interpolated values dfs0

Line series Interpolated values dfs1

Area series Discrete values dfsu

Interpolated values dfs2, dfsu

Horizontal plane Discrete values dfsu, dfs2

series
Interpolated values dfs2, dfsu

Vertical plane Discrete values dfsu

series
Interpolated values dfs2

Powering Water Decisions 301

 Data Extraction FM

Table 24.1 List of file types for the output files

Output format Data type File type

Volume series Discrete values dfsu

Interpolated values dfs3, dfsu

Cross-section Not relevant dfs0

Domain series Not relevant dfs0

Table 24.2 List of tools for viewing, editing and plotting results

File type Viewing/editing tools Plotting tools

dfs0 Time Series Editor Plot Composer

dfs1 Profile Series Editor Plot Composer

Result Viewer

dfs2 Grid Series Editor Plot Composer

Data Viewer Result Viewer
Data Viewer

dfs3 Grid Series Editor Plot Composer

Result Viewer

dfsu Data Viewer Data Viewer

Data Manager Result Viewer
Plot Composer (2D)

Time step
The temporal range (first and last time step) and time step frequency refers to
the time steps in the input file. Note, that 0 is the first time step in the input
file.

Point series
You must select the map projection (LONG/LAT, UTM-32 etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal location of the points.

The geographical coordinates of the points are either taken from the dialog or
from a file. The file format is an ascii file with four space separated items for
each point on separate lines. The first two items must be floats (real num-
bers) for the x- and y-coordinate. For 3D field data the third item must be an
integer for the Layer number if discrete values are selected and a float (real
number) for the z-coordinate if interpolated values are selected. The layers

302 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Output

are numbered 1 at the bed and increasing upwards. For 2D field data the
third item is unused (but must be specified). The last item (the remaining of
the line) is the name specification for each point.

Layer number
The layer number selected for discrete values in the point output is defined
from the lowest active layer (=1) increasing upwards. In case the mesh is a
type sigma mesh the number of active layers in the water column will always
be the same in any point in the domain. In case the mesh is a combined
sigma-z level mesh the number of active layers may vary in the domain. An
example is shown in Figure 24.1.

Figure 24.1 Example of layer numbers in point output specification in case of com-
bined sigma-z level mesh

Line series
You must select the map projection (LONG/LAT, UTM-32 etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal location of the points.

The line is defined by defining a polyline in the horizontal domain. The

polyline is given by a number of geo-referenced points. A minimum of two
points is required. The polyline is composed of a sequence of line segments.
The line segments are straight lines between two successive points. The geo-
graphical coordinates are taken from the dialog or from a file. The file format
is an ascii file with three space separated items for each of the points on sep-
arate lines. The first two items must be floats (real numbers) for the x- and y-
coordinate (Easting and Northing or Longitude and Latitude). For 3D field

Powering Water Decisions 303

 Data Extraction FM

data the third item must be a float (real number) for the z-coordinate. For 2D
field data the third item is unused (but must be specified)

Note: If spherical coordinates (map projection LONG/LAT) is used for a 3D

model simulation, the line must be either a horizontal or a vertical line.

Area series
You must select the map projection (Long/Lat, UTM-32, etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal spatial information.

If discrete values is selected for the data type the discrete field data within a
polygon can be selected. The closed region is bounded by a number of line
segments. You must specify the coordinates of the vertex points of the poly-
gon. Two successive points are the endpoints of a line that is a side of the
polygon. The first and final point is joined by a line segment that closes the
polygon. The geographical coordinates of the polygon points are taken from
the dialog or from a file. The file format is an ascii file with three space sepa-
rated items for each of the two points on separate lines. The first two items
must be floats (real numbers) for the x- and y-coordinate. The third item is
unused (but must be specified).

If interpolated values is selected for the data type the values is calculated on
a structured grid (overlay). For each direction you should specify

 The origin
 The grid spacing
 The number of grid points

Furthermore, the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified. This is
defined as the angle between y-axis in the selected projection and the y-axis
of the grid measured clockwise.

Horizontal plane series

You must select the map projection (Long/Lat, UTM-32, etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal spatial information.

If discrete values is selected for the data type the discrete field data within a
polygon can be selected. The closed region is bounded by a number of line
segments. You must specify the coordinates of the vertex points of the poly-
gon. Two successive points are the endpoints of a line that is a side of the
polygon. The first and final point is joined by a line segment that closes the
polygon. The geographical coordinates of the polygon points are taken from
the dialog or from a file. The file format is an ascii file with three space sepa-
rated items for each of the two points on separate lines. The first two items
must be floats (real numbers) for the x- and y-coordinate. The third item is
unused (but must be specified). For the vertical type the following 6 options
are available

304 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Output

 Layer number
 Layer number above bed
 Distance above bed
 Distance below surface
 z-coordinate
 Percentage of water column

If interpolated values is selected for the data type the values is calculated on
a structured grid (overlay). For each direction you should specify

 The origin
 The grid spacing
 The number of grid points

Furthermore, the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified. This is
defined as the angle between y-axis in the selected projection and the y-axis
of the grid measured clockwise. Finally, the z-coordinate for the horizontal
plane must be specified.

Layer specification
When "Layer number" is specified for the "Vertical type", the number refer to
the vertical discretization specified on the Vertical Mesh page. Here the layers
are numbered 1 at the lowest layer and increase upwards. In case of a com-
bined sigma-z level mesh only the active elements are saved in the output.
An example is shown in Figure 24.1. When "Layer number above bed" is
specified for the "Vertical type", the number is defined from the lowest active
layer (=1) increasing upwards. In case the mesh is a type sigma mesh, the
number of active layers in the water column will always be the same in any
point in the domain. In case the mesh is a combined sigma-z level mesh, the
number of active layers may vary in the domain. An example is shown in
Figure 24.2.

Vertical plane series

You must select the map projection (Long/Lat, UTM-32, etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal spatial information.

The vertical plane is defined by defining a polyline in the horizontal domain.

The polyline is given by a number of geo-referenced points. A minimum of
two points is required. The polyline is composed of a sequence of line seg-
ments. The line segments are straight lines between two successive points.
The geographical coordinates are taken from the dialog or from a file. The file
format is an ascii file with three space separated items for each of the points
on separate lines. The first two items must be floats (real numbers) for the x-
and y-coordinate (Easting and Northing or Longitude and Latitude). The third
item is not used (but must be specified).

Powering Water Decisions 305

 Data Extraction FM

If discrete values is selected for the data type you must also specify the range
of layers (first and last Layer number) which should be stored in the output file
The intersection between the line segments and the faces of the unstructured
mesh is determined and added to the list of points on the polyline. A vertical
unstructured mesh is then created from the horizontal polyline points and the
vertical discretization for the computational mesh. For each element of the of
vertical mesh the discrete value at the centroid is determined as the discrete
value in the element of the computational mesh, where the centroid point is
located.

If interpolated values is selected for the data type the values is calculated on
a structured grid (overlay). You should specify the number of grid points along
the polyline. For the vertical direction the minimum and maximum z value and
the number of grid points should be specified.

In the dfs2 output file Dimension 1 is the coordinate along the polyline and
Dimension 2 is the vertical coordinate (z-direction). The origin in the z-direc-
tion in the dfs2 file is determined as the specified maximum z value.

Layer number
The layer number(s) selected for the vertical plane output refer to the vertical
discretization specified on the Vertical Mesh page. Here the layers are num-
bered 1 at the lowest layer and increase upwards. In case of a combined
sigma-z level mesh only the active elements are saved in the output.

Volume series
You must select the map projection (Long/Lat, UTM-32, etc.) in which you
want to specify the horizontal spatial information.

If discrete values is selected for the data type the discrete field data within a
polygon can be selected. The closed region is bounded by a number of line
segments. You must specify the coordinates of the vertex points of the poly-
gon. Two successive points are the endpoints of a line that is a side of the
polygon. The first and final point is joined by a line segment that closes the
polygon. The geographical coordinates of the polygon points are taken from
the dialog or from a file. The file format is an ascii file with three space sepa-
rated items for each of the two points on separate lines. The three items must
be floats (real numbers) for the x-, y- and z-coordinate. You must also specify
the range of layers (first and last Layer number) which should be stored in the
output file.

If interpolated values is selected for the data type the values is calculated on
a structured grid (overlay). For each direction you should specify

 The origin
 The grid spacing
 The number of grid points

306 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Output

Furthermore, the orientation of the grid at the origin must be specified. This is
defined as the angle between y-axis in the selected projection and the y-axis
of the grid measured clockwise.

Note, the origin, z0dfs3, in the z-direction in the dfs3 file is determined as
z0dfs3 = z0 + dz*(nz-1), where z0 is the user specified origin, dz is the grid
spacing and nz in the number of grid points.

Layer number
The layer number(s) selected for the volume output refer to the vertical dis-
cretization specified on the Vertical Mesh page. Here the layers are num-
bered 1 at the lowest layer and increase upwards. In case of a combined
sigma-z level mesh only the elements containing water are saved in the out-
put. An example is shown in Figure 24.2.

Figure 24.2 Example of layer numbers in volume output specification in case of

combined sigma-z level mesh

Cross-section series
The cross section is defined by defining a polyline in the horizontal domain.
The polyline is given by a number of geo-referenced points which together
make up a polyline. A minimum of two points is required. The polyline is com-
posed of a sequence of line segments. The line segments are straight lines
between two successive points. The geographical coordinates are taken from
the dialog or from a file. The file format is an ascii file with three space sepa-
rated items for each of the two points on separate lines. The first two items
must be floats (real numbers) for the x- and y-coordinate. The third item is

Powering Water Decisions 307

 Data Extraction FM

unused (but must be specified). The polyline (cross section) in the numerical
calculations is defined as a section of element faces. The face is included in
the section when the line between the two element centres of the faces
crosses one of the line segments. The faces defining the cross section are
listed in the log-file.

You must also select the map projection (Long/Lat, UTM-32, etc.) in which
you want to specify the horizontal location of the points.

By definition, discharge is positive for flow towards left when positioned at the
first point and looking forward along the cross-section line. The transports are
always integrated over the entire water depth.

24.2.3 Output items

All output items are optional, i.e. the user is free to select among the items in
the input file.

For volume series (3D output) the (hidden) Z coordinate item is automatically
selected in order for the output file to be treated as a proper 3D unstructured
data file in for example the Data Viewer.

Discharge
When selecting discharge output for the flow you can select the following
items:

 Discharge - volume flux

 Accumulated discharge - accumulated volume flux
 Positive discharge
 Accumulated positive discharge
 Negative discharge
 Accumulated negative discharge

By definition, discharge is positive for flow towards left when positioned at the
first point and looking forward along the cross-section line. The transports are
always integrated over the entire water depth.

308 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 TI M E S E R I E S C O M PA R A T O R

Powering Water Decisions 309

310 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Introduction

25 Time Series Comparator

25.1 Introduction
The Time Series Comparator (TSC) is a MIKE Zero post processing tool
which facilitates the comparison of two time series by computing some perfor-
mance measures and producing relevant comparison plots. This tool is
designed to assess the performance of MIKE Powered by DHI numerical
models by comparing numerical outputs to local measurements at the calibra-
tion and validation stages.

25.2 Graphical User Interface

A new TSC document can be created by using the “File > New > File” menu
(shortcut CTRL + N) and then selecting the TSC document (extension .tsc)
under the “MIKE Zero” branch of “Product Types”.

The Graphical User Interface of the TSC is divided into tabs:

 Settings
 Comparison results
 Log

Figure 25.1 Selecting Time Series Comparator tool

Powering Water Decisions 311

 Time Series Comparator

25.2.1 Settings

The “Settings” tab is the default tab of the TSC GUI. It is the place where the
time series files to compare are set up.

The user setups a comparison by (numbers refer to Figure 25.2 below):

1. Selecting the observation data file

2. Selecting the simulation data file
3. Adjusting the time interval where the comparison will be carried out
4. Defining time series pairs for comparison
5. Defining output data (optional)
6. Launching the comparison

The validation area (7) displays errors encountered during the set-up pro-
cess. No comparison can be performed if errors are detected.

Figure 25.2 Settings tab dialog.

Numbers refer to description above

Comparison table
The Comparison table is where the user defines the different time series pairs
he wants to compare using this tool ((4) in Figure 25.2). A comparison is

312 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Graphical User Interface

defined by pairing an item of the observation data file with an item of the sim-
ulation data file.

Figure 25.3 Comparison table in Settings Dialog

Multiple comparisons can be defined and included (or excluded) in the com-
parison process. However at least one needs to be included in order to ena-
ble the comparison process (provided that no other setup errors have been
detected).

Once the comparison has been executed, individual comparison results can
be displayed using the View link of each Comparison pair (located in the out-
right column of the Comparison table).

Output File
Optionally Time Series files (dfs0) of observation, simulation and difference
can be saved for each defined combination in the above Comparison table
((5) in Figure 25.2). The “ – Combination i” will be augmented to the filename
defined in the GUI for each defined combination (where i is the number of the
comparison).

25.2.2 Comparison results

“Comparison” tabs present results of each individual comparison set defined

by the user on the “Settings” tab.

For each comparison set, the following information is displayed to the user
(numbers refer to Figure 25.4 below):

1. The “Comparison settings” for the current combination set

2. A “Scatter Plot” of the Observation data versus the Simulation data
3. “Time Series Plots” of Observation, Simulation and Difference
(= OBS – SIM )
4. “Performance Measures”
(see Scientific Background for detailed description)
5. Basic “Statistics”
(minimum, maximum, average and standard deviation)

Powering Water Decisions 313

 Time Series Comparator

Figure 25.4 Comparison dialog.

Numbers refer to description above

25.2.3 Log

The “Log” tab displays the Log file content of the current TSC analysis..

25.3 Scientific Background

When evaluating the modelling skills, numerical performance measures are
used. These measures serve different purposes. First, at different stages in
the modelling process performance criteria are used as an important element
in the analysis of the model credibility, i.e. to evaluate if the model is suffi-
ciently accurate for the purpose of the modelling being considered. Secondly,
numerical performance measures are used in the calibration to evaluate the
improvement in model performance as the parameter estimation process pro-
ceeds. Numerical measures are used in manual calibration together with
visual judgement to evaluate the goodness-of-fit. In automatic calibration
numerical performance measures are used explicitly as objective functions to
be optimised.

Commonly applied numerical performance measures based on comparing

time series of simulated values and observed equivalents are given in
Table 25.1.

314 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Scientific Background

Table 25.1 Continuous time series statistics

OBSi is the observed value and SIMi is the simulated equivalent.
OBS and SIM are the average of the observed and simulated values,
respectively. The statistics are evaluated over the period with observa-
tions i=1,...,N

Perfomance measure Equation

1 N
Mean error ME = ----   OBS i – SIM i  = OBS – SIM
Ni = 1

1 N
Mean absolute error MAE = ----  OBS i – SIM i
Ni = 1

Root mean squared

1 N
error RMSE = ----   OBS i – SIM i  2
Ni = 1

Standard deviation
1 N
of residuals STD = ----   OBS i – SIM i –  OBS – SIM   2
Ni = 1

2
N

Coefficient of   OBSi – OBS   SIMi –SIM 

2 i=1
determination R = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N N
2 2
  OBS i – OBS    SIMi – SIM 
i=1 i=1

Coefficient of efficiency   OBSi – SIMi  2

i=1
(Nash-Sutcliffe E = 1 – -------------------------------------------------
coefficient) N
2
  OBS i – OBS 
i=1

N
  OBSi – SIMi  2
i=1
Index of agreement d = 1 – ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
N
2
  SIM i – OBS + OBS i – OBS 
i=1

Powering Water Decisions 315

 Time Series Comparator

The mean error (ME), root mean squared error (RMSE), and standard devia-
tion of residuals (STD) are related via the equation:

2 2 2
RMSE = ME + STD (25.1)

The ME is a measure of the general offset between measurements and simu-

lations (bias), whereas STD is a measure of the dynamical correspondence.
The RMSE is an aggregate measure that includes both bias and dynamical
behaviour. The RMSE is often used as an overall measure of comparison.
The splitting of the RMSE into ME and STD cf. eq. (25.1) provides more
insight into the modelling error, i.e. if it is related to a general model bias or if
the model has problems replicating the dynamics. The mean absolute error
(MAE) is an overall measure of comparison similar to RMSE but puts less
emphasis on the largest errors as compared to RMSE where errors are
squared.

The ME, MAE, RMSE and STD statistics are all dimensional measures with
units of the variable considered. Dimensionless measures can be defined by
using relative residuals in the equations, i.e. by dividing (OBSi – SIMi) with
the observation OBSi within the summation. If the variable considered has
values that cover a large range (over several decades), the dimensional and
dimensionless measures may give different interpretations on model perfor-
mance. While the dimensional measures are sensitive to high extremes, the
dimensionless measures are sensitive to low extremes. To put less emphasis
on high extremes one may also use statistics based on logarithmic trans-
formed values. The effect of this is virtually similar to using relative residuals.

Table 25.1 includes also three goodness-of-fit measures; the coefficient of

determination R2, the coefficient of efficiency or Nash-Sutcliffe coefficient E
(Nash and Sutcliffe, 1970), and the index of agreement d (Willmott et al.,
1985). All these measures are dimensionless, and hence are preferable
when comparing model performance related to different observed time series
(i.e. different variables, locations, and periods).

The R2 is the square of the Pearson’s product-moment correlation coefficient.

It ranges from 0 to 1 with larger values indicating a better fit. The R2 meas-
ures the best linear fit between observed and simulated values. Thus, the
measure is insensitive to bias and proportional differences (i.e. if SIMi = a
OBSi + b, then R2 = 1), and hence large R2 values may actually be obtained
for models that have serious errors. Another drawback of the R2 measure is
that it is more sensitive to outliers than values close to the mean (Legates
and McCabe, 1999).

The coefficient of efficiency is widely used to evaluate model performance in

hydrological modelling. It ranges from minus infinity to 1 with larger values
indicating a better fit. An important special case is E = 0, which can be
obtained if SIMi = OBS , indicating that the average of the observed values in
this case is as good a predictor as the model. Thus, one would most likely
require that E > 0 for the model to be fit (unless, for instance, a large bias is

316 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Example

accepted). The coefficient of efficiency measures the one-to-one relationship

between observed and simulated values, and hence it is sensitive to bias and
proportional effects. In this respect it provides an improvement to the R2
measure. However, E is also sensitive to high extremes as R2. The coeffi-
cient of efficiency using logarithmic transformed values is often used to
reduce the sensitivity on high extremes. It should be emphasised that E is
based on the sum of squared residuals, and hence provides the same infor-
mation on goodness-of-fit as the RMSE measure.

The index of agreement is not as widely used as E and R2. It ranges from 0
to 1 with large values indicating a better fit. The d measure is also based on
the sum of squared residuals, but standardised according to a potential error
(the term in the summation in the denominator represents the largest error
that each (SIMi – OBSi)2 can reach). As is the case with E and R2, d is also
sensitive to outliers.

25.3.1 References

Legates, D.R., McCabe, G.J., (1999), Evaluating the use of goodness-of-fit

measures in hydrologic and hydroclimatic model validation, Water Resour.
Res., 35(1), 233-241

Nash, J.E., Sutcliffe, J., (1970), River flow forecasting through conceptual
models, Part I A discussions of principles, J. Hydrol., 10, 282-290.

Willmott, C.J., Ackleson, S.G., Davis, R.E., Feddema, J.J, Klink, K.M., Leg-
ates, D.R., O’Donnell, J., Rowe, C.M., (1985), Statistics for the evaluation
and comparison of models, J. Geophys. Res., 90, 8995-9005.

25.4 Example
An example of use of the TSC is provided with the official distribution under:

C…\MIKE_ZERO\TimeSeriesComparator\Oresund

The example data is based on the Oresund model as described in the MIKE
21 FM HD Step by Step guide.

25.4.1 Data Files

From this model, different two observation / measurements data at the loca-
tion Ndr. Roese (NR) are provided:

 obs NR currents.dfs0
 obs NR waterlevel.dfs0

Time Series Outputs of two different models runs at the same NR location are
also provided:

Powering Water Decisions 317

 Time Series Comparator

 sim NR HD Run1.dfs0
 sim NR HD Run2.dfs0

As described in the calibration section of the 2D model in MIKE FM HD step

by step guide, both simulations only differ by two parameters:

1. the “Bed Resistance” parameter which has a value of 32 m1/3/s in Run1

and 45 m1/3/s in Run2
2. the “Smagorinsky coefficient” for the “Horizontal Eddy Viscosity” has a
value of 0.28 in Run1 and 0.24 in Run2

25.4.2 Setups

For each run, three different setups of the TSC are provided to assess the
performance of the numerical model against available measurement at the
NR location:

 Setup Run1a – Single.tsc

 Setup Run1b – Multi.tsc
 Setup Run1c – Waterlevel.tsc
 Setup Run2a – Single.tsc
 Setup Run2b – Multi.tsc
 Setup Run2c – Waterlevel.tsc

The “single” setups define only one single comparison combination for the
current speed parameter while the “multi” setups present different possible
comparison combinations. The “waterlevel” setups define comparison for this
item using the observed datafile “obs NR waterlevel.dfs0”.

25.4.3 Results

As presented graphically in the MIKE HD FM step by step guide, currents

velocities in the second run are enhanced by the changes made in the bed
resistance and eddy viscosity parameters. Similar conclusions can of course
be drawn using the Time Series Comparator – see for example the scatter
plots for the current speed parameter in Figure 25.5 below.

318 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Example

Figure 25.5 Scatter plot OBS vs SIM for the current speed parameter at NR
Left: Run1, Right: Run2

But the Time Series Comparator allows a more objective comparison by pro-
viding numerical value for different performance indices as shown in
Table 25.2 for each run.

Table 25.2 Performance indices between OBS and SIM data for the current speed
parameter at NR

Perfomance index Value Run1 Value Run2 Unit

Mean error 0.2283 0.0594 [m/s]

Mean absolute error 0.2402 0.1044 [m/s]

Root mean squared error 0.2716 0.1277 [m/s]

Standard deviation of residuals 0.1473 0.1131 [m/s]

Coefficient of determination 0.8896 0.8976 [-]

Coefficient of efficiency -0.2504 0.8455 [-]

Index of agreement 0.8246 0.9639 [-]

Time Series Comparison results on the surface elevation parameter show the
modification made between two runs are insignificant.

Powering Water Decisions 319

 Time Series Comparator

320 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 R E S U L T VI E W E R

Powering Water Decisions 321

 Result Viewer is a powerful tool for presentation of results from model appli-
cations.

File Menu
Edit Menu
View Menu
Projects Menu
Display Properties
Window Menu
Result Viewer Toolbar

322 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

File Menu

26 Result Viewer
The information provided in the present manual is related, specifically, to the
use of the MIKE Zero Result Viewer for the applications involving presenta-
tion of results from DHI numerical modelling software within the MIKE Zero
suite.

It is organized logically following the appearance on the menu pages.

26.1 File Menu

This is where you open, save and close files, and access printer related utili-
ties. The menu consists of the below Windows standard commands, plus a
special Print Setup command.

New
Opens the standard MIKE Zero File/New dialog where you can choose to cre-
ate a document type.

Open
Opens the standard MIKE Zero File/Open dialog where you can choose to
open an existing document.

Close
Closes the active document.

Save
Saves the Animator mza-file.

Save As
Saves the Animator mza-file as a new file.

Print
Produces a hardcopy of the current plot.

Print Preview
Shows a preview of the hardcopy, as it will appear on the hardcopy device.

Print Setup
Here you may select the printer and modify its setup. This is also where you
choose the layout of the paper and the paper size.

26.2 Edit Menu

Clipboard and object editing

Undo
Undo latest command.

Powering Water Decisions 323

 Result Viewer

Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies and pastes your selected data through the Windows clipboard.

Copy/Paste View
Copies and pastes the current view between different instances of Result
Viewer, Data Viewer, the Graphical overview tab in the FM Input Editor, Data
Manager and the Grid Series Editor.

Ctrl+Shift+C/Ctrl+Shift+V can be used as accelerator keys.

26.3 View Menu

This is where you change margins, add toolbar views, status bar and modify
the magnification of the view. You can also export to graphics.

26.3.1 Coordinate Overlays

This menu makes it possible to overlay the workspace area with a geograph-
ical net showing the longitudes and latitudes, a map projection grid and an
arrow pointing towards true North.

Map Projection
You can add or remove lines of constant Eastings and Northings in the dis-
play.

You can select which map projection net to overlay. Per default the displayed
map projection net is defined as in the work area.

North Arrow
You can add or remove a north indicator in the display.

You can choose between different types of indicators as well as specify a

given position for the north indicator to be placed in the display.

26.3.2 Mouse Pointer Coordinates

The mouse coordinates displayed can be one of the following types:

 (x,y) coordinates (grid)

 (lon,lat) coordinates
 Map projection coordinates

324 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

View Menu

26.3.3 Zoom facilities

Zoom In
Allows you to zoom in on the plotted data and change the focus of the plot.

Zoom to coordinates
Allows you to zoom in on an area specified by (x,y) coordinates.

Zoom Out
Zooms out to default coverage.

26.3.4 Profile

This enables you to load, save and create a new profile plot.

If you have a profile open you can save the current profile location. This
allows you to create stardard profiles for comparing scenarios.

26.3.5 Export Graphics

The entire plot area with all plot objects within can be exported.

Copy to Clipboard
Copies the selected data to the clipboard. The general idea is that the graph-
ics from an object at any time can be copied to a standard Windows applica-
tion which supports GDI-operations. An example could be to export the
graphics to MS Word. Activate the "Copy to Clipboard" function, then switch
to MS Word and activate the "Paste"-function or press "Ctrl" V in and active
Word document, and then a copy of the plot appears in MS Word.

Save to Metafile
Saves the current plot to an enhanced meta file.

Save to Bitmap
Saves the current snapshot plot to a bitmap file.

Save Vectors to Shape file

Saves the total vector field for the current time step as polylines in a shape
file. The polylines will have the scale as shown in the Result Viewer.
Note: Polylines can be visualised by an arrow symbol in e.g. ArcMap.

Save Isoline to Shape file

This feature allows the isolines of the current view to be saved to a shape-file
(alternatively to an xyz-file).
The current palette with the separating values between the different colors
defines the list of isolines that are captured to the specified file.

Powering Water Decisions 325

 Result Viewer

Batch command
It is possible to generate graphic files through a batch-command once the
graphical setup file (.rev) has been generated in the Result Viewer.

Open a DOS-prompt and type one of the following commands:

 MzResultApp input.rev [-options] -printtofile output.png

 MzResultApp input.rev [-options] -print_to_file output.png

Alternatively you may create other file types e.g. output.bmp, output.jpg or
out-put.tif.

The options [-screen], [-height xxx] and [-width xxx] can be applied to set the
size (pixel resolution) of the image. The option [scalefont] (alternatively
[scale_font]) can be applied to scale the font size in case the height or the
width of the image is user defined.

Writing MzResultApp -? in a DOS prompt will show the full syntax of the com-
mand.

26.3.6 Aspect ratio

This value defines how the display is scaled relatively in the x- and y-axis
direction.

26.3.7 Toolbar

Allows you to insert and remove toolbars. The Result Viewer Toolbar provides
a number of tools especially relevant for the Result Viewer.

26.3.8 Status Bar

Toggles the status bar at the bottom of the window on and off. While it pro-
vides useful information, it may be convenient to toggle the status bar off for
an increased viewing area.

326 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Projects Menu

26.4 Projects Menu

26.4.1 Add Files to Project

Figure 26.1 Add files to project dialog

This is where you add a new file to the project. The file can be a number of
types:

 Enhanced Meta File

 Graduated Time Series File
 Image File
 Mesh File
 MIKE 11 Reservoir Result Files
 MIKE 11 Result File
 MIKE 21 C Result File
 MIKE 21 Result File
 MIKE 3 Result File
 MIKE FM Result file
 MIKE SHE Result File
 MIKE URBAN File
 MOUSE Result File
 NS 3 Result File
 Particle File
 Profile Series File

Powering Water Decisions 327

 Result Viewer

 Shape File
 XYZ File

Some of the documentation for the individual modules (e.g. MIKE SHE) con-
tains further description and examples related to the use of the Result Viewer.

MIKE 21 Result File

If your file has been recognized as a standard output file from MIKE 21 HD,
i.e. containing the items H Water depth, P-flux and Q-flux and with Data type
= 1, you get the additional option of selecting one of the derived items: Sur-
face Elevation, Current Velocity in the X direction, Current velocity in the Y
direction or Current Speed.

Note: The calculations of derived items are based on the assumption of the
absolute delete value in the file is very small, e.g. -10-30. The use of other
delete values may lead to incorrect derived results in grid cells next to cells
holding delete values.

26.4.2 Overlay Manager

Figure 26.2 Overlay manager dialog

Here you specify what is shown on the plot.

You can also specify which item goes on top, by using the up/down arrow but-
tons.
If e.g. an item is very low on the list (high number), it will be plotted on top of
an item higher on the list, thus creating a different picture than if the two were
switched around.

328 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Projects Menu

26.4.3 Active View Settings

The display of each of the layers must be defined. Dependent of the type of
result file, different properties can be set.

For further description, please see Display Properties (p. 330).

26.4.4 Work Area

Figure 26.3 Work area definition

The work area for the presentation is set by specifying the extent of the work-
ing area and the projection to be used.

The display of the results will always be directed towards North.

26.4.5 Video

Video properties
You can control various output settings for the video. Which ones and in what
way is dependent on the particular plot object(s).

Double Buffering
This is a special drawing technique, that allows flicker-free animations. Dou-
ble Buffering is only used if the plot control is active.

File name
The video file name is the name of the AVI-file used for generation of video
output from the plot.

Frame rate
The Frame rate is the number of frames per second that is displayed in the
video.

Image size
The Image size for a single plot object is defined by the layout in the plot. The
Image size for multiple plot objects can be defined by one of three options:

Powering Water Decisions 329

 Result Viewer

 Minimum rectangle enclosing all plots

The image in the video is automatically set to the minimum size.

 Full paper
The image will display the full page of the plot

 Custom
Here you define the margins for the image to control the size.

Record
Record a video in avi format. Besides the format you can select how long the
video should be (no. of frames), the speed of the video (frame rate), the
image size and the output name and directory.

In case you want to stop the recording before the end of the animation press
‘Escape’.

Snapshot
Make a still picture in either *:BMP, *:JPEG, *.PNG or *.TIF format. Besides
the format you can select the image size and the output file name.

26.5 Display Properties

26.5.1 Common View Properties

Figure 26.4 Common view properties

This is where you define the overall style of the display area.

Properties like title, display of title, x- and y-axis annotation, display of info
line, properties of geographical and map projection overlay, displayed map

330 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

projection and position of attached overlay like the e.g. the color legend can
be controlled.

Line style
You can customize the line style by width and color.

26.5.2 Image file

Figure 26.5 Image file properties

This is where you define the display style of an image. Using transparent col-
ours gives the possibility to view several layers.

The size and position of the image in the work area is given in the projection,
such as they are defined in the Work Area.

Powering Water Decisions 331

 Result Viewer

26.5.3 Background tiles

Figure 26.6 Background tiles

This is where you can select to display a background derived from a number
of different map themes or satellite images available from the web.

Interpolation type
Choose between bilinear and nearest neighbour. Bilinear gives a nicer and
smoother rendering of especially the texts embedded in the background
image, whereas nearest neighbour might be a few % faster.

Transformation accuracy
Is specified in % of the covered area. The reason why it's given in % is that
covers projection accuracy in both length units like meter and feet, but also in
degrees. The accepted range is from 0.0001% to 1% of the covered area.
Modifying the value will have greater effect the more distorted the projection
is. Specifying a value closer to the max of 1% allows for a faster but less
accurate reprojection of the background images.

332 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

26.5.4 Grid (Curvilinear, Rectangular or Unstructured)

Figure 26.7 Grid properties

This is where you define the display style of a grid.

You may define contours, isolines and which item of the data file to display.
The Layer no. refers to the layers in 3-dimensional data files.

Isolines
You can customize the display of both isolines and isoline labels.

Miscellaneous
You can customize the line styles and include/exclude a color legend for the
selected item.

Powering Water Decisions 333

 Result Viewer

26.5.5 Shapes

Figure 26.8 Shape file properties

This is where you define the display style of a shape file.

You define how the points, lines/polygons and text annotations are to be dis-
played.

The shape file must be georeferenced within the Work Area to be displayed.

334 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

26.5.6 Vectors

Figure 26.9 Vector properties

This is where you specify to include vectors or not.

You need to define the items for the X- and Y-coordinate, respectively. You
have the option to specify the vector scale, and to plot only some of the vec-
tors in the domain.

You specify the style of the vectors in the Vector Options dialog.

Powering Water Decisions 335

 Result Viewer

26.5.7 Vector Options

Figure 26.10 Vector Options

This is where you define the display style of the vectors.

You can specify a limit on the vector length, and the color and thickness of the
displayed vectors.

26.5.8 Branches

Figure 26.11 Branch properties

336 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

This is where you define the display of branches from a MIKE 11 model
setup.

You can define the branch width and the branch colour.

26.5.9 Pipes

Figure 26.12 Pipes properties

This is where you define the display of pipes from a MIKE URBAN CS or
MOUSE setup.

You can define the pipes width and colour.

26.5.10 Profiles

This is where you define the display of e.g. a cross-section plot of a saturated
zone from a MIKE SHE simulation.

See also Profile Extractor (p. 357).

Powering Water Decisions 337

 Result Viewer

Symbol and Fonts

Figure 26.13 Symbol and fonts for longitudinal profile plot

338 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Graphical Items

Figure 26.14 Graphical item properties in longitudinal profile plot

In this dialog you specify the layout for the individual graphical items. If you
click on the Details... button for the item, you will get the 3D Items properties
dialog where you can change the colour scale and plotting characteristics for
the cross-section, see page 341.

Powering Water Decisions 339

 Result Viewer

Tabular Items

Figure 26.15 Tabular item properties in longitudinal profile plot

In this dialog you specify the layout for the individual tabular items.

When you add a tabular item you must specify whether it is a static item or a
dynamic item.

Figure 26.16 Selection of tabular item

340 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

User defined indicators

Figure 26.17 User defined indicator properties

In this dialog you specify the layout for the individual user defined indicators.

26.5.11 3D Items properties

In this dialog you can change the colour scale and plotting characteristics for
a cross-section.

Powering Water Decisions 341

 Result Viewer

Style

Figure 26.18 Style of contours in cross-section plots for 3D items.

Color

Figure 26.19 Colours for contours in cross-section plot for 3D items

342 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Vectors

Figure 26.20 Vector properties in cross-section plot for 3D items

26.5.12 Cross-section

Figure 26.21 Cross-section properties

This is where you specify how a MIKE 11 cross-section can be displayed.

Powering Water Decisions 343

 Result Viewer

See also Cross-section extractor (p. 359).

26.5.13 UZ plot

Figure 26.22 Available UZ plot properties that can be modified.

UZ properties displays unsaturated zone water contents and flow from a

MIKE SHE simulation.

See also UZ Specific Plots (p. 360).

Style
This is where you specify the style of the contours.

Color
This is where you specify the colour of the contours.

26.5.14 Baseline

A baseline represents the spatial outline of a Profile series file defined by the
geographical origin, orientation and extent.

The baseline can be shown as a combination of Lines and Points.

Lines
This is where you define the display of the line.

You can define the line thickness, line style and line color.

344 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Figure 26.23 Baseline line style

Points
This is where you define the display of the points on the line.

There are two types of point symbols:

 Predefined vector symbols gives you a selection of typical point sym-

bols from which to choose. You can modify the color, point fill style and
size.
 Enhanced metafile allows you to import and use your own point symbol
in the display. You can modify the orientation and size of the metafile
symbol.

Furthermore you have to option to define the drawing order.

Powering Water Decisions 345

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.24 Baseline point style

26.5.15 Spatial line

A spatial line represents item values along a Baseline from a Profile series
file, e.g. the coastline position or spatially distributed transport.

The spatial line can be shown as a combination of Lines and Points.

Lines

Figure 26.25 Spatial line line style properties

This is where you define the display of the spatial line.

346 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

You can display the line in two ways:

 Spatial line
A line will display the item values in the file
 Vector profile
The item values will be displayed as vectors extending perpendicular
from the baseline. You will have the option of selecting the number of
vectors to show.

You can specify the line in two ways:

 Distance from baseline

The chosen item value is interpreted as a distance from the baseline.
You will have the option of scaling this distance in the display.
 Geographical position
You must define two items representing the (x,y) position of the grid
points representing the line.

You can define the line thickness, line style and line color.

Points
This is where you define the display of the points on the line.

Figure 26.26 Spatial line point style properties

There are two types of point symbols.

 Predefined vector symbol gives you a selection of typical point sym-

bols from which to choose. You can also modify the color and point fill
style.

Powering Water Decisions 347

 Result Viewer

 Enhanced metafile allows you to import and use your own point symbol
in the display. You can modify the orientation of the metafile symbol.

The size of the symbol can be fixed or associated to a variable.

The color of a predefined symbol can be fixed or associated to a variable

using a color palette.

Furthermore you have to option to define the drawing order.

26.5.16 Colors

The color palette specify the colors used for displaying data according to var-
ious levels. You may create a palette and save it for later use.

Figure 26.27 Color properties

26.5.17 Particles

This is where you define the display of the individual particles.

348 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Figure 26.28 Particles properties

The particles are displayed by marker symbols.

There are two types of Marker symbols:

 Predefined vector symbol gives you a selection of typical point sym-

bols from which to choose. You can also modify the color and marker fill
style.
 Enhanced metafile allows you to import and use your own point symbol
in the display. You can modify the orientation and size of the metafile
symbol

You may choose to have a fixed size for all the markers or have the size vary
according to the value of a selected variable. In the latter case the marker
scale factor can be used to resize the marker.

You may choose to display the particles for only the current time step, a num-
ber of recent time steps or all the time steps. The tail length defines the num-
ber of recent time steps to display.

Annotations
You can show annotations for selected particles.

You may choose to show all variables, or a selected few.

The display of annotations can also be specified by Filters.

Powering Water Decisions 349

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.29 Annotations for Particles

Filters
You can define filters such that only a part of the particles or annotations are
displayed.

Figure 26.30 Filters for displaying particles

350 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Figure 26.31 Specifying filter: this only display the first 4 particles

26.5.18 Particle tracks

This is where you define the display of the particle tracks.

Figure 26.32 Particle Track style properties

You can define the line thickness, style and color of the lines.

The Track length may be displayed as the total track, the track from start to
current time step or the recent track only (current with Tail).

26.5.19 XYZ data

Line Styles
The Line Styles dialog is an entry where you describe the column order of the
xyz data to display.

Powering Water Decisions 351

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.33 Line styles for lines connecting xyz points

Only the first three or four columns in the xyz files are considered (depending
on the number of columns in the file). A sample of the contents from the
selected xyz file is displayed for overview.

It is possible to connect the individual xyz points with a line. You can define
the thickness, style and color for the lines. It is possible to display only closed
polygons and to define polygon fill style.

In case the file contains xyz data only, the points connects as they are listed
in the xyz file, otherwise the connecting lines are defined by the values in the
connectivity column.

Point Styles
This is where you define the display of the individual xyz points.

352 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Display Properties

Figure 26.34 Point styles for xyz points

The points are displayed by marker symbols.

There are two types of Marker symbols:

 Predefined vector symbol gives you a selection of typical point symbols

from which to choose. You can also modify the color and marker fill style.
 Enhanced metafile allows you to import and use your own point symbol
in the display. You can modify the orientation and size of the metafile
symbol

You may choose to have a fixed size for all the markers or have the size vary
according to the value of a selected variable. In the latter case the marker
scale factor can be used to resize the marker.

You may choose to display only a part of the points by specifying a point fre-
quency > 1.

Annotations
You can show annotations for selected points. You may choose to show all
the variables, or a selected few.

Powering Water Decisions 353

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.35 Annotation for xyz point data

26.6 Window Menu

This menu provides you with the standard Windows views and allows you to
switch between different open windows.

26.7 Result Viewer Toolbar

Many of the functions in the Results Viewer are the same as those available
in other DHI software tools (e.g., 2D Grid Editor). Additional tools available in
the result viewer are summarized in Table 26.1 and below.

Table 26.1 Description of Result Viewer tools

Button Name Description

Rewind Rewinds result files to first time step

Previous Step Rewinds result files to the previous time step.

Generates an avi file from the current time step to

Video Reverse
the first time step

354 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Result Viewer Toolbar

Table 26.1 Description of Result Viewer tools

Button Name Description

Plays result files from the current time step to the

Play Reverse first time step. Identical to Video Reverse except an
avi file is not generated.

Stops forward and reverse playing of result files and

creation of avi files.
Stop Animation
Note: It is always possible to stop an animation by
pressing the <esc> key.

Plays result files from the current time step to the

Play Forward last time step. Identical to Video Forward except an
avi file is not generated.

Generates an avi file from the current time step to

Video Forward
‘ the last time step

Advances result files from the current time step to

Next Step
the next time step

Wind Advances results files to the last time step

Rewinds or advances result files to the specified

Go to time step
time step

Change the time step used by the result viewer. The

Time step time step can be less than or greater than the result
file time step

Default Default selection tool.

Tool to extract time series data from result files. Mul-

tiple time series can be extracted by holding down
Time series extrac- the Ctrl key while left-clicking. A single extraction or
tor the last multiple extraction is selected using a dou-
ble left-click.
(See also p. 356).

Tool to extract vertical profiles (cross-sections) from

3D result files. Vertices of a profile line are specified
Profile Extractor with a single left click and the profile line is closed
with a double left-click.
(See also p. 357)

Cross-section Tool to extract cross-sections of MIKE 11 results at

extractor H-points. (See also p. 359)

Powering Water Decisions 355

 Result Viewer

Table 26.1 Description of Result Viewer tools

Button Name Description

Tool to extract a UZ plot of the water content in the

unsaturated zone. This tool generates a plot of
water content versus depth with time. This tool can
UZ Plot
only be used on one cell at a time. A cell is selected
by double left-click.
(See also p. 361).

Limits displays of results to unsaturated zone calcu-

lation cells. This button is only activated if unsatu-
UZ Scatter plot
rated zone data is displayed in the result viewer.
(See also p. 360).

Displays interpolated unsaturated zone results in

non-calculation cells and unsaturated zone results
UZ Filled Plot in calculation cells. This button is only activated if
unsaturated zone data is displayed in the result
viewer. (See also p. 360).

Longitudinal pipe Displays pipes in longitudinal plot. Consequtive

plot nodes must be selected

Time series pipe Display time series plot for pipe network. Multiple
plot time series can be selected

26.7.1 Time series extractor

The Time Series tool allows you to plot a time series of all the data available
in the current view. To select display of time series data you must click on the
Time series extractor icon, .

A single time series can be selected by double-clicking in the desired loca-

tion. Time series can be extracted from multiple locations by holding down the
Ctrl-key and left clicking on each desired location. When selecting multiple
locations the Ctrl-key should be held down while double clicking on the last
location.

After selecting the locations of the time series files to extract you have the
option to deselect some of the selected points and to accumulate the data
over the simulation period (Figure 26.36). After making the appropriate selec-
tions/deselections press the OK button to generate the time series plot. The
entire extraction process can be stopped by pressing the Cancel button. An
example of a time series plot generated in the Results Viewer is shown in
Figure 26.37.

356 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Result Viewer Toolbar

Figure 26.36 Selection of time series items to extract

Figure 26.37 Time series plot generated using the time series extraction tool

Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right-clicking in the graphical

view including zooming, exporting images, exporting time series data as dfs0
files, and modification of the time series plot properties.

26.7.2 Profile Extractor

To display a cross section plot of a set of 3D gridded data, you must click on
the Profile icon, . Clicking on this icon will allow you to interactively
define a cross-section by left-clicking at each vertex of the profile line and
double-clicking to close the profile.

Powering Water Decisions 357

 Result Viewer

After closing the profile, the following dialogue will be displayed listing the
available output items.

Only one of these items can be selected. After selecting your item, click OK
and the profile will be displayed.

The profiles extractor tool can be used to extract a cross-section through sim-
ulated MIKE SHE and MIKE 11 results. The type of cross-section created is
dependent on the simulated data displayed in the result viewer. For example,
if the result viewer contains simulated 3D heads and MIKE 11 results then the
cross-section will have simulated water levels and simulate MIKE 11 canal
stages.

After defining the profile, the items to be displayed on the profile should be
selected. The resulting profile is shown in Figure 26.38. As with the other
tools, extracted profiles can be animated on the screen and/or exported as
avi and image files.

358 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Result Viewer Toolbar

Figure 26.38 Resultant profile generated with the profile extractor tool

You can modify the plot by right clicking on the plot and selecting Properties
form the pop-up menu, see Profiles (p. 337).

As with the other tools available in the result viewer, users should experiment
with the available options to learn how to fully use the result viewer profile
extractor.

Saving and loading profiles

If you have a profile open, under the View/Profile item in the top menu bar (p.
325), you can save the current profile location. This allows you to create
stardard profiles for comparing scenarios.

To load a saved profile, make the plan view plot active, by either minimising
or closing open profile plots. The View/Profile/Load option becomes active
and you can load a saved profile and select the profile item normally.

26.7.3 Cross-section extractor

MIKE 11 results can also be added to the result viewer and simulated canal
water levels can be displayed using the Cross-section extractor. The cross-
section extractor shows simulated stages and the geometry of the cross-sec-
tion being viewed.

To display a cross section plot from MIKE 11 results, you must click on the
Cross-section icon, . After selecting the cross-section extractor tool, move
the cursor over the location you want to extract the MIKE 11 results from
(Figure 26.39). The simulated results are displayed along with the cross-sec-
tion geometry (Figure 26.40). As with the other tools, extracted profiles can
be animated on the screen and/or exported as .avi and image files.

Powering Water Decisions 359

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.39 Selection of a MIKE 11 cross-section location in the result viewer

Figure 26.40 Resultant MIKE 11 cross-section plot

Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right-clicking in the graphical

view. Since the cross-section plots are relatively simple, modifications are
limited to changing line and marker properties, cross-section markers, etc.
See also Cross-section (p. 343).

26.7.4 UZ Specific Plots

UZ Scatter and Filled Plots

For unsaturated zone results, scatter or filled plots can be generated. UZ
Scatter and Filled Plots are only different for simulations that do not use the
“calculation in all cells” UZ module option.

UZ Scatter plots only show simulated results for UZ calculation cells. The
number of UZ calculation cells may be less than the total number of active
model domain used by the overland and saturated zone modules if the UZ
module for the simulation is not using the “calculation in all cells” option. An
example of when use of the UZ scatter plot is useful is shown in Figure 26.41.

360 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Result Viewer Toolbar

Figure 26.41 A) UZ Scatter Plot and its relationship to B) the UZ calculation cells

An example of a UZ Filled Plot is shown in Figure 26.42. In cases where the

UZ module for the simulation is not using the “calculation in all cells” option
the Result Viewer interpolates values from the calculation cells to adjacent
inactive UZ cells.

Figure 26.42 UZ Filled plot

UZ Plot
UZ Plots can only be extracted from simulated unsaturated zone water con-
tents and flow. This is because UZ plots display results for a single column for
all of the UZ calculation nodes in the column. Other simulated UZ results
show net values for the entire UZ (i.e., infiltration, recharge to the SZ, etc.).

After selecting the UZ Plot extractor tool, , move the cursor over the col-
umn you want to extract the results from and double-click (Figure 26.43).
Results from multiple UZ columns cannot be displayed on the same UZ Plot.

Powering Water Decisions 361

 Result Viewer

Figure 26.43 Extracting a UZ Plot from simulated unsaturated water contents and
flow

The simulated water content results for the selected column are displayed in
Figure 26.44. The UZ Plots show either water content or unsaturated zone
flow for each node in the column (y-axis) for the entire simulation (x-axis).

Figure 26.44 Example UZ plot of unsaturated zone water content

Addition graphical functions can be accessed by right-clicking in the graphical

view. Modifications that can be made include changing the interpolation
methods, adding the mesh, adding isolines, changing the colour schemes,
etc. See also UZ plot (p. 344).

An example of a modified UZ plot with the mesh displayed and only showing
the upper five meters of the soil column is shown in Figure 26.45.

362 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Result Viewer Toolbar

Figure 26.45 Close up of upper 5 meters of soil column with the calculation grid dis-
played

Powering Water Decisions 363

 Result Viewer

364 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 UNIT BASE GROUP EDITING

Powering Water Decisions 365

366 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Introduction

27 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

27.1 Introduction
All MIKE Powered by DHI products use a standard library of data units, called
the Engineering Unit Management (EUM) library. Every time you open a
model the default Unit Base Groups file, ‘EUM.ubg’ is read. This file is saved
and located in the local application data folder, e.g.

C:\Users\[User]\Local Settings\AppData\Local\DHI\MIKE Zero\[Year]

where [User] is the user identification name and [Year] the release year.

The Unit Base Group Editing Utility is a tool for the advanced user to edit the
default units for various item types.This allows you to change the displayed
units for any value that is included in the library.

The MIKE Zero models are per default setup to work with a selection of
European data units, however it is possible to customize the MIKE Zero work
environment to another unit system, e.g. US-units, that specifies an alterna-
tive EUM Unit Type for the given EUM Item Type (see 27.3 Changing from SI
to Imperial (American) data units. (p. 371)).

Note: Not all modules in MIKE Zero are prepared for showing alternate units
in the dialogs.

27.1.1 Technical background

All data in MIKE Zero (either given as a constant or in a DFS data file) is
based on an EUM Item Type (a string containing the item name) and one of
the related EUM Unit Types (a string specifying the corresponding unit). The
EUM library contains the selected user unit for each EUM Item Type. The first
registered unit of the possible EUM unit types is termed the FRU-unit, and is
considered to be the default base unit of the given EUM item type. FRU units
are typically SI units or units derived directly from SI units.

Figure 27.1 shows the data flow in MIKE Zero, in terms of user interface and
pre- and post-processing components.

Powering Water Decisions 367

 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

Figure 27.1 Data flow in MIKE Zero with respect to units

The solution is based on the following principles:

 The core unit management is done using the EUM libraries, and the item
types and units supported therein

 All files - both parameter and data files - store data in their default base
units (FRU)

 From file to GUI, parameters and data values are maintained in the
default base units

 In the GUI, the units are entered and displayed in "user units". Conver-
sion between base units and user units is done in the GUI

The above implies that computational engines read pfs data and parameters
directly in their default base units (FRU). No unit conversion takes place in
the computational engine.

27.2 Dialog Overview

To change the display units of any EUM Item Type, you must close all open
documents and then select “Options”--> “Edit unit base groups...” from the
File pull down menu shown below.

368 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Dialog Overview

Figure 27.2 File pull-down menu

When you select this menu item, the Unit Base Group Editing dialog appears,
see Figure 27.3. By default all of the data units for each active module are
displayed. For a clearer overview of the item types, close all of the model
engines that are not relevant.

Powering Water Decisions 369

 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

Figure 27.3 Unit Base Group Editing Dialog

To change a unit select the data item that you want to change the units of.
Then select the new units from the combo box list of available units.

After you have changed the data units, click ’Save and Close’. This saves
your changes to the default Unit Base Groups file (EUM.ubg).

Note: If you have already added data to your model, changing the Unit Base
Group will not convert any of your data. This process simply changes the dis-
played units in the user interface and the conversion factors used to make the
input files internally consistent.

In some cases the relevant data item name is not clear, as there may be sev-
eral data items with similar names. This is more likely to occur if several mod-
ules are selected at the same time. To find out which data item is correct,
close the dialog and re-open your model. Then either move the mouse to the
relevant text box, where a fly-over text box should appear telling you what is
the relevant item type for this field. Alternatively, for gridded data, you can use
the Create button to create a data file and then notice the item type that is dis-
played in the dialog.

370 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Changing from SI to Imperial (American) data units.

Finally, occasionally, you may find that the data unit that you are looking for is
not available. In this case, contact your local Technical Support Centre, who
should forward your request to the developer for inclusion in the next release.

27.3 Changing from SI to Imperial (American) data units.

The default Unit Base Groups file ‘EUM.ubg’ is read every time you open a
model. In the Program Files bin-directory there are two standard Unit Base
Group files: ‘EUM_Default_Units.ubg’ and ‘EUM_US_Units.ubg’.

The first is the default file and contains standard SI units for all data items in
all of the MIKE Zero products. The second contains standard Imperial (US)
units for most data items in all of the MIKE Zero products.

To change the display units for all of your data items to Imperial units, load the
EUM_US_Units.ubg file, Save and Close the dialog and then reopen your
model (i.e. the EUM_US_Units.ubg file will be copied to EUM.ubg).

If you want to change individual data items to SI or Imperial, you can change
the items individually. Then use the Save and Close button to save your
changes back to the EUM.ubg file. If you want to create and save special unit
versions, then you can copy the EUM.ubg to a different filename and reload
it.

Note: Not all modules in MIKE Zero are prepared for showing Imperial
(American) Data Units.

27.4 Restoring the default units

You can return to your default unit specification at any time, by loading either
one of the default .ubg files, EUM_Default_Units.ubg or EUM_US_Units.ubg.
These files are found in the bin directory for the MIKE Zero installation in Pro-
gram Files.

IMPORTANT: If you want to save any of your model specific changes, then
you should first save the EUM.ubg to a new name.

27.5 Verification of Item Types

When you create a DFS data file, you must also define the EUM item type for
each parameter in the file. When you assign a DFS file or DFS file item to an
input parameter value, then MIKE Zero automatically verifies that the correct
EUM item type is being used. If the wrong item type is present then you will
not be able to select OK in the file browser dialog.

For example, in the following set of dialogs shown in Figure 27.4, an Evapo-
transpiration time series was selected instead of the correct Precipitation time
series file.

Powering Water Decisions 371

 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

The first error is in the Select Item tab (upper dialog), where there is a mes-
sage that no Valid Items are found.

To find out why there is no valid items, you should look in the Constraints Info
tab (centre dialog). In you can see that the item type is supposed to be Pre-
cipitation Rate, but this constraint has failed.

To find out what the item type of the selected file is, look at the Item Info tab
(lower dialog) where you can see that the current item type is Evapotranspira-
tion Rate.

Figure 27.4 Verification of EUM type validity

27.6 Changing the EUM item type of a Parameter

The next two sections outline how to change the EUM type of an existing dfs0
file and dfs2 file, respectively.

Alternatively you may change the EUM type of any existing data file by using
the MIKE Zero tool ‘Data Utility...’ shown at the bottom of the File pull-down
menu.

372 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Changing the EUM item type of a Parameter

27.6.1 Changing the EUM Type of a .dfs0 Parameter

To change the EUM item type of a parameter in a .dfs0 file, open the time
series in the Time Series Editor and then select the Properties... item from the
Edit drop down menu, see Figure 27.5.

Figure 27.5 Edit drop down menu in Time Series Editor

This opens the item properties dialog (Figure 27.6) where you can change
the EUM item type and the EUM unit type that is assigned for each item in the
file.

Powering Water Decisions 373

 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

Figure 27.6 Dfs0 Item Properties dialog

27.6.2 Changing the EUM Type of a .dfs2 Parameter

To change the EUM item type of a parameter in a .dfs2 file, open the grid file
in the Grid Editor and then select the Items... item from the Edit drop down
menu, see Figure 27.7.

Figure 27.7 Edit drop down menu in Grid Editor

This will open the Edit Properties dialog for the Grid Editor (Figure 27.8)
where you can change the EUM item type and the associated EUM unit type.

374 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Changing the EUM item type of a Parameter

Figure 27.8 Dfs2 Item Properties dialog

Powering Water Decisions 375

 Unit Base Group Editing Utility

376 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 D A TA U T I L I T Y

Powering Water Decisions 377

378 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S
Introduction

28 Data Utility Editor - the DFS Header Editing Utility

28.1 Introduction
The Data Utility is a tool for the advanced user to edit header information in
DFS data files.

From the Main Menu of the MIKE Zero window, open the File menu and then
choose Options, followed by Data Utility... to open the MzDataUtility window.

From the Main Menu of the MzDataUtility window you may choose Open in
the File menu to open an existing DFS file.

With Data Utility, you can edit various DFS header information, such as:

 File Overview
 Dynamic Items
 Static Items
 Custom Blocks
 Data Type and Delete Values

28.2 File Overview

Figure 28.1 File Overview dialog

In this dialog you can edit the common file information such as file title, time
axis and geographical information.

Powering Water Decisions 379

 Data Utility Editor - the DFS Header Editing Utility

28.3 Dynamic Items

Figure 28.2 Dynamic Item information dialog

In this dialog you can edit the item information such as item name, type and
unit.

You may also edit the spatial axis.

28.4 Static Items

Figure 28.3 Static Item information dialog

380 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Custom Blocks

In this dialog you get an overview of the dimension of the static items con-
tained in the file. It is not possible to edit the data.
Note that static items only appear in some output files.

28.5 Custom Blocks

Figure 28.4 Custom blocks dialog

In this dialog you may edit the custom blocks.

For some files model specific information are stored in the custom blocks (for
example the coastline orientation in a LITPACK line series file).

28.5.1 M21_Misc

Many MIKE 21 and MIKE 3 “classic” data files have a custom block called
"M21_Misc". It is a block of 7 floats:

1. Orientation at origin relative to true north.

2. Drying depth.
3. Code for identifying whether or not the data contains geographical infor-
mation; it is -900 if it contains geographical information.
4. The zland value, the value above which bathymetric data (the data itself
in case of bathymetry data file; the prefix record containing the bathyme-
try in other cases) is considered as land.
5. Number of grid points in x-direction (in case of 3D).
6. Number of grid points in y-direction (in case of 3D).

Powering Water Decisions 381

 Data Utility Editor - the DFS Header Editing Utility

7. Number of grid points in z-direction (in case of 3D).

Note that not all values necessarily are used for the particular file.

28.5.2 MIKE_FM

Dfsu files may have a custom block called “MIKE_FM”. The block contains 5
floats:

1. Number of nodes
2. Number of elements
3. Dimension of file: 2 (2D) or 3 (3D)
4. Number of layers
5. Highest Sigma layer number

Note that not all values necessarily are used for the particular file.

28.6 Data Type and Delete Values

Figure 28.5 Data Type and Delete Values

In this menu you may edit the data type and the delete values used in the
model.

382 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Data Type and Delete Values

The data type is a numerical marker that enables various models to recog-
nize the origin of the file and the data type may be used as part of the verifica-
tion of the file contents. The data type is set automatically when the data file
is written, but if you have manually edited a data file so that it complies with a
particular data type, you will need to edit the designated data type yourself for
the various models to accept it.

Some of the frequently used data types are shown in Table 28.1.

Table 28.1 Data type values for various data files

Dimension Data Description Data type

0,1,2,3 Generic data for general use 0

2 MIKE 21 HD output data 1

(H,P,Q) only

2 MIKE 21 HD hot start data 11

2 MIKE 21 ST output data 4

2 MIKE 21 PMS wave radiation stresses 930

1 LITPACK cross-shore profile 101

0 LITPACK wave climate 102

3 MIKE 3 HD output data 3

2,3 MIKE 21/3 HD FM output data 2001

2 MIKE 21 HD output data (H only) -1

Powering Water Decisions 383

 Data Utility Editor - the DFS Header Editing Utility

384 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

 INDEX

Powering Water Decisions 385

 Index

Numerics Dfsu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

1D bathymetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 DFSU files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Discrete values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
A Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Add mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Double Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172
Algebraic box method . . . . . . . . . 218 Draw Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Analyse mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 E
Arc editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Edit mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Arc Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Editing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 60, 75 EUM Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
ASCII files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 EUM item type . . . . . 367, 368, 373, 374
Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 EUM Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Axis information . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 55 EUM unit type . . . . . . . . . . 367, 373
Exclude from Triangulation . . . . . . . 162
B Export Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Batch command . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Export Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Bisection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Export graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Box Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Export Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Break line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Export to ASCII File . . . . . . . . . . .28
Export to xyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
C Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Calculator . . . . . . . 41, 63, 95, 264, 282
Closed Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . 141 F
Collapse element . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Field type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Collapse element face . . . . . . . . . 229 File Formats . . . . . . . . . . 40, 58, 71
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 File Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Column data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 File Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . .32
Connection of boundaries . . . . . . . 213 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Context sensitive menu . . . . . . . . . 142 Fixed Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 257 Flexible Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Convert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Font Settings Dialog . . . . . . . . . . .39
Convert Scatter Data . . . . . . . . . . 177 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Coordinate Overlays . . . . . . . . . . 170
Crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 278 G
Custom block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Gap Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 General Information . . . . . . . . .32, 55
Generate mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
D Go To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Graphical and font settings . . . . . .38, 58
Datum shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Graphical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Datum transformation . . . . . . . . . . 205 Graphical View . . . . . . . . . 36, 57, 86
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Grid rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Delete Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 195
Delete mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . 225 I
Delete value . . . . . . . . . . . 295, 328 Imperial (US) units . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Derived item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Import Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
DFS2 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Import Graphic Layers . . . . . . . . . 205
Import Scatter Data . . . . . . . . . . 176

386 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S

Index

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 P
Insert Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Point Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . 42, 157, 288 Point data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Point Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Inverse Distance Weigthed interpolation . . Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
191 Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Item information . . . . . . . . 34, 56, 380 Polygon Properties . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Polygon selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
L Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Land Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Land Generation . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Prioritization area . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Layer number . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 307 Profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 204
Line rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . 190 Q
LITPACK Orientation . . . . . . . . . . 54 Quadrangular mesh . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Local Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
R
M Redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
M21_Misc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Map projection . . . . . . . . . . . 302, 303 Refine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Mark element values . . . . . . . . . 277 Refine Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Re-interpolate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Re-triangulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mesh Definition File . . . . . . . . . . 139 S
Mesh editing mode . . . . . . . . . . 195 Scatter data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Mesh files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Segment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
MIKE_FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Select area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Move mesh node . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Select Sub-Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Select Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
N Shape file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Natural Neighbour Interpolation . . . . 190 Shoreline Morphology . . . . . . . . . . 197
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 SI units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Navigation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Smooth Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
New data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
New File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 51, 73 Spatial properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 289
North to Y orientation . . . . . . . 127, 131 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

O T
Open Boundaries . . . . . . . . . 141, 144 Tabular View . . . . . . . . . . 36, 57, 85
Open file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Temporal range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 130 Time axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Time step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Powering Water Decisions 387

 Index

Transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Triangulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
TS Types graphical representation . . . 38

U
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Unit Base Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Unit Base Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

V
Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259, 301
Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Vertical position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
View Colour Legend . . . . . . . . . . 185
View Scatter Data . . . . . . . . . . . 185

W
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 205

X
XYZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
XYZ files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Z
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 58, 269

388 MIKE Zero - © DHI A/S